Integra Stereo Receiver DTR 84 User Manual

DTR-8.4_En.book Page 1 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
AV Receiver  
DTR-8.4  
Instruction Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 3 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Precautions  
For U.S. Models  
Modèle pour les Canadien  
Note to CATV system installer:  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system  
installer’s attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which  
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in partic-  
ular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected  
to the grounding system of the building, as close to the  
point of cable entry as practical.  
CNR-210, Dispositifs de radiocommunications de fai-  
ble puissance, exempts de licence (pour toutes les ban-  
des de fréquences)  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisee:  
FCC Information for User  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-  
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-  
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
CAUTION:  
The user changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use  
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-  
out permission of the copyright holder.  
2. AC Fuse— The AC fuse inside the DTR-8.4 is not  
user-serviceable. If you cannot turn on the DTR-8.4,  
contact your Integra/Onkyo dealer.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the DTR-8.4  
all over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a  
soft cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild  
detergent and water. Dry the DTR-8.4 immediately  
afterwards with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive  
cloths, thinners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents,  
because they may damage the finish or remove the  
panel lettering.  
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-  
tion against harmful interference in a residential instal-  
lation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is  
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a partic-  
ular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to  
radio or television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-  
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of  
the following measures:  
4. Power  
WARNING  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician  
for help.  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION  
CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country. Make  
sure that the voltage in your area meets the voltage  
requirements printed on the DTR-8.4’s rear panel (e.g.,  
AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
For Canadian model  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
Setting the [STANDBY/ON] switch to STANDBY does  
not fully shutdown the DTR-8.4. If you do not intend to  
use the DTR-8.4 for an extended period, remove the  
power cord from the AC outlet.  
RSS-210, Low Power Licence-Exempt Radiocommuni-  
cations Devices (All Frequency Bands)  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 4 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Table of Contents  
Basic  
Introduction  
Important Safety Instructions..........................................................................................2  
Precautions .......................................................................................................................3  
Features.............................................................................................................................6  
Supplied Accessories.......................................................................................................7  
Before Using the DTR-8.4.................................................................................................8  
Front & Rear Panels..........................................................................................................9  
Remote Controller...........................................................................................................14  
About Home Theater.......................................................................................................21  
Connecting the DTR-8.4  
PositioningYour Speakers .............................................................................................22  
Attaching the Speaker Labels........................................................................................22  
ConnectingYour Speakers.............................................................................................23  
Connecting Antennas.....................................................................................................24  
AV Cables & Sockets ......................................................................................................26  
ConnectingYour TV or Projector ...................................................................................27  
AV Components ..............................................................................................................28  
Audio Components.........................................................................................................34  
Connecting a Power Amp...............................................................................................36  
Connecting  
Components........................................................................................36  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components...................................................37  
Connecting the RS232 Port............................................................................................37  
Connecting the Power Cord...........................................................................................37  
Turning On the DTR-8.4..................................................................................................38  
Basic Setup  
About the Onscreen Setup Menus ................................................................................39  
Speaker Settings.............................................................................................................40  
Input Setup ......................................................................................................................45  
Digital Setup..................................................................................................................45  
Video Setup...................................................................................................................46  
Component Video Setup ...............................................................................................47  
Remote Setup..................................................................................................................48  
Specifying the TV System (Australian model only).....................................................49  
Changing the Input Source Display ..............................................................................50  
Basic Operation  
Selecting the Source AV Component............................................................................51  
Muting the DTR-8.4 (remote controller only).................................................................52  
Using the Sleep Timer (remote controller only).............................................................52  
Setting the Display Brightness ......................................................................................52  
Using Headphones........................................................................................................52  
Setting the Input Signal Format.....................................................................................53  
Fixing the Digital Input Format ......................................................................................53  
Using the Tuner ...............................................................................................................54  
Listening Modes..............................................................................................................56  
Using the Digital Surround Modes................................................................................60  
Display Indicators & Source Info...................................................................................61  
Adjusting the Volume of Individual Speakers ..............................................................62  
Using the Re-EQ function ..............................................................................................62  
Using the Late Night function........................................................................................62  
Others  
Troubleshooting..............................................................................................................99  
Specifications................................................................................................................103  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 5 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Table of Contents—Continued  
Advanced  
Introduction  
2
22  
39  
Connecting the  
DTR-8.4  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components  
Entering a Remote Control Code.......................................................................88  
Remote Control Codes......................................................................................89  
Controlling a Satellite Receiver .........................................................................91  
Controlling a VCR..............................................................................................91  
Controlling a TV.................................................................................................92  
Controlling a Cable Receiver.............................................................................92  
Learning Commands from Another Remote Controller ..................................93  
Using Macros.......................................................................................................94  
Editing Remote Controller Modes .....................................................................96  
Adding New Remote Controller Modes .............................................................96  
Reordering the Remote Controller Modes.........................................................96  
Deleting Remote Controller Modes ...................................................................97  
Assigning Remote Controller Modes.................................................................97  
Changing the Remote Controller’s Transmission Signal Format (IR/RF).......98  
Resetting the Remote Controller .......................................................................98  
Basic Setup  
Advanced  
Features  
Basic  
Operation  
51  
63  
67  
Advanced  
Operation  
Advanced Setup  
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources ..................................................67  
Assigning the A & B 12V Trigger Outputs.........................................................68  
Audio Adjust Functions......................................................................................68  
Setting Preferences.............................................................................................72  
Volume Setup ....................................................................................................72  
Headphones Level ............................................................................................72  
OSD Setup ........................................................................................................73  
OSD Position.....................................................................................................73  
Naming Presets & Input Sources.......................................................................73  
Using IntelliVolume .............................................................................................74  
Advanced  
Features  
Advanced  
Setup  
Net-Tune  
Zone 2  
75  
84  
88  
Advanced Operation  
Using the Multichannel Input .............................................................................63  
Recording.............................................................................................................65  
Advanced  
Features  
Using the Remote  
Controller with  
Other  
Net-Tune  
Components  
About Net-Tune....................................................................................................75  
NetworkingYour DTR-8.4....................................................................................76  
Using Internet Radio...........................................................................................77  
Playing Net-Tune Server Tracks .........................................................................79  
Music Server Settings.........................................................................................81  
Network Settings.................................................................................................82  
Advanced  
Features  
Others  
99  
Zone 2  
Connecting Zone 2..............................................................................................84  
Using the Remote Control in Zone 2 .................................................................85  
Setting the Surr Back/Zone 2 Outputs ..............................................................86  
Controlling Zone 2...............................................................................................87  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 6 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Features  
Amp  
FM/AM Tuner  
• 7-channel amplifier  
• 40 FM/AM presets  
• FM auto tuning  
• 110 watts per channel into 8 ohms, 20 Hz to 20 kHz,  
less than 0.08% total harmonic distortion (FTC rating)  
Others  
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)  
• Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus (OSD)  
• Remote controller has scroll wheel and LCD display  
for quick and easy operation  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters (not surround back  
channels)  
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) for left, cen-  
ter, and right channels  
• Zone 2 (multiroom/multisource) capability  
Audio/Video  
• IntelliVolume  
*1  
• THX Surround EX  
• Character input for naming radio presets and input  
sources  
• THX Select certified  
• Net-Tune for Internet radio and MP3 and WAV play-  
back  
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic  
II  
*2  
• Ethernet port for use with Net-Tune  
• DTS, DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS Neo:6,  
*3  
and DTS 96/24  
THX Select  
*4  
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround mode  
Before any home theater component can be THX Select  
certified, it must pass a rigorous series of quality and  
performance tests. Only then can a product feature the  
THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the  
Home Theater products you purchase will give you  
superb performance for many years to come. THX  
Select requirements define hundreds of parameters,  
including power amplifier performance, and pre-ampli-  
fier performance and operation for both digital and ana-  
log domains. THX Select receivers also feature  
proprietary THX technologies (e.g., THX Mode) which  
accurately translate movie soundtracks for home the-  
ater playback.  
• Non-Scaling configuration  
• Advanced 32-bit dual DSP chips  
• 96 kHz/24-bit D/A converters (surround back chan-  
nels only)  
• 2 component video inputs, 1 output  
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-  
ite video conversion  
• Composite and S-Video to component video upcon-  
version  
• 6 S-Video inputs, 3 outputs  
• 7 assignable digital inputs (4 optical, 3 coaxial),  
2 digital outputs, 1 optical digital input for video 5  
input  
• Pre outs for front L/R, center, surround L/R, surround  
back L/R (or Zone 2 L/R), and Subwoofer  
*1. THX is a trademark or registered trademark of THX Ltd.  
*2. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
*3. DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES, and Neo:6 are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
*4. Theater-Dimensional and Net-Tune are trademarks of Onkyo Corporation.  
Re-Equalization and the Re-EQ logo are trademarks of THX Ltd.  
Windows Media, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation  
in the United States and/or other countries.  
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.  
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Multimedia.  
Xiva is a registered trademark of Imerge Limited.  
Xantech is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.  
Niles is a registered trademark oh Niles Audio Corporation.  
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter added to the end of the product name indicates the color of the DTR-8.4. Specifications  
and operation are the same regardless of color.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 7 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Thank you for purchasing an Integra/Onkyo AV Receiver.  
Please read this manual thoroughly before making connections and plugging in the unit.  
Following the instructions in this manual will enable you to obtain optimum performance and listening  
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
Supplied Accessories  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
AM loop antenna  
75/300-ohm antenna adapter  
(Australian model only)  
Remote controller (RC-550M) &  
three batteries (AA/R6)  
Power cord  
(Plug type varies from country to country)  
Indoor FM antenna  
(Connector type varies from country to country.)  
1
2
3
Speaker Cable  
Speaker cable labels  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 8 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Before Using the DTR-8.4  
Installing the Batteries  
Using the Remote Controller  
To use the remote controller, point it at the DTR-8.4’s  
remote control sensor, as shown below.  
To open the battery compartment, press  
the small hollow and slide off the cover.  
1
Remote control sensor  
DTR-8.4  
Standby indicator  
30˚  
30˚  
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)  
2
in accordance with the polarity diagram  
inside the battery compartment.  
Notes:  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the  
DTR-8.4 is subjected to bright light, such as direct  
sunlight or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this  
in mind when installing.  
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in  
the same room, or the DTR-8.4 is installed close to  
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-  
ler may not work reliably.  
Put the cover onto the remote controller  
and slide it shut.  
3
• Don’t put anything, such as a book, on the remote con-  
troller, because the buttons may be pressed inadvert-  
ently, thereby draining the batteries.  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the  
DTR-8.4 is installed in a rack behind colored glass  
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.  
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-  
cle between it and the DTR-8.4’s remote control sen-  
sor.  
Notes:  
• The batteries should last for about six months,  
although this will vary with usage.  
You can set the transmission signal format to infrared  
(IR), or radio frequency (RF) for use with the optional  
RF Receiver. This is useful when, for example, the  
DTR-8.4 is installed in a rack or is not in line of sight  
of the remote controller.  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try  
replacing the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long  
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from  
leakage or corrosion.  
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-  
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 9 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Front & Rear Panels  
Front Panel  
1 B C D  
E
F
G
H
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Pure Audio  
(
)
)
Zone  
2
GRN  
(
Rec RED  
Audio  
Selector  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Display  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
1
2
Push To Open  
-
DTR 8.4  
I J K  
Front door  
Push here to open the flap  
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone 2  
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Digital  
L M NOPQRS T UVWX Y Z a b  
c
For detailed information, refer to the pages in parenthesis.  
A Standby/On button (38)  
This button is used to set the DTR-8.4 to On or  
Standby.  
D Input selector buttons & indicators (51)  
These buttons are used to select the following input  
sources: DVD, VIDEO 1–5, TAPE, TUNER,  
PHONO, CD, and NET AUDIO. The indicators  
show the currently selected input source.  
B Standby indicator (38)  
This indicator lights up when the DTR-8.4 is in  
Standby mode, and it flashes while a signal is being  
received from the remote controller.  
The indicators also show which input source is  
selected for Zone 2, in which case they light up  
green, or which input source is selected for record-  
ing (REC OUT), in which case they light up red.  
C Audio Selector button (53)  
This button is used to select the audio input signal  
format: analog, digital, or multichannel.  
E Display  
See “Display” on page 11.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 10 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
F Remote-control sensor (8)  
This sensor receives control signals from the remote  
controller.  
W FM Mode button (54)  
This button is used to select the FM radio Auto and  
Mono modes.  
G Display button (61)  
X Setup button  
This button is used to display various information  
about the currently selected input source.  
This button is used to access the onscreen setup  
menus (OSD) that appear on the TV.  
H Master Volume control (51)  
This control is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4 from 0 to 100.  
Y Tuning [ ] [ ] buttons (54)  
These buttons are used to tune into radio stations  
and to select items on the onscreen setup menus  
(OSD).  
I Direct/Pure Audio button (59)  
This button is used to select the Direct or Pure  
Audio listening modes.  
Z Enter button  
This button is used when navigating the onscreen  
setup menus (OSD), entering names, and confirm-  
ing settings.  
J Pure Audio indicator (59)  
This indicator lights up when the Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode is selected.  
a Preset [ ] [ ] buttons (54)  
These buttons are used to select radio presets and to  
select items on the onscreen setup menus (OSD).  
K Upsampling indicator (69)  
This indicator lights up when the Upsampling func-  
tion is on.  
b Return button  
This button is used to return to the previously dis-  
played onscreen setup menu (OSD).  
L Phones jack (52)  
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-  
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.  
c Video 5 Inputs (33)  
These optical digital audio, S-Video, composite  
video, and analog audio inputs can be used to con-  
nect a camcorder, games console, and so on.  
M Zone 2 Level [ ] [ ] buttons (87)  
These buttons are used to set the volume for Zone 2.  
N Rec Out button (65)  
This button is used to select the input source that  
you want to record via the REC OUTs (i.e., TAPE  
OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, VIDEO 2 OUT).  
O Zone 2 button (87)  
This button is used to select the input source for  
Zone 2.  
P Off button (65, 87)  
This button is used to turn off the REC OUTs (i.e.,  
TAPE OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, VIDEO 2 OUT) or  
Zone 2.  
Q Stereo button (59)  
This button is used to select the Stereo listening  
mode.  
R Surround button (59)  
This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS lis-  
tening modes.  
S THX button (59)  
This button is used to select the THX listening  
modes.  
T DSP [ ] [ ] buttons (59)  
These buttons are used to select the DSP (digital  
signal processor) listening modes.  
U Dimmer button (52)  
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.  
V Memory button (54)  
This button is used when storing and deleting radio  
presets.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 11 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
Display  
1
2
3
4
5 6  
For detailed information, refer to the pages in parenthesis.  
1Audio input format indicators (53)  
These indicators show the audio input format for the  
currently selected input source.  
4Multipurpose display area  
Normally, the name of the currently selected input  
source is displayed here. When you select the AM  
or FM input source, the radio frequency and preset  
number are displayed. If you press the [Display]  
button, the currently selected listening mode and  
digital audio format are displayed.  
2Listening mode & digital audio format  
indicators (61)  
These indicators show the currently selected listen-  
ing mode and digital audio format.  
5Volume level (51)  
3Tuning indicators (54)  
The volume level is displayed here.  
AUTO indicator:  
6SLEEP indicator (52)  
This indicator lights up when the Sleep function has  
been set.  
This indicator lights up when the tuner is tuned to  
an FM station and Stereo mode is selected. It goes  
off when Mono mode is selected.  
TUNED indicator:  
This indicator lights up when the tuner is tuned into  
an AM or FM station.  
FM STEREO indicator:  
This indicator lights up when the tuner is tuned to a  
stereo FM station. It goes off when Mono mode is  
selected.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 12 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
Rear Panel  
1 C D FG L K M P  
S
Y
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
FRONT  
SUB  
COAX  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
OUT  
1
2
3
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 8.4  
:
RATING AC120V  
60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
INPUT  
Y
1
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
PB  
PR  
2
3
4
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
60Hz  
R
L
SWITCHED  
SUB  
CENTER  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
A
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IR  
AC INLET  
IN  
ZONE  
2
12V  
TRIGGER OUT  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
IN  
2
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
B Z EHI J O  
N Q R T U W V X  
For detailed information, refer to the pages in parenthesis.  
A DIGITAL IN COAX 1–3, OPT 1–4 (28, 30, 32,  
34, 35)  
E MULTI CH INPUT—FRONT L/R, SUB,  
CENTER, SURR L/R, SURR BACK L/R (29)  
These analog audio inputs can be used to connectAV  
components with multiple analog audio outputs,  
including DVD players with individual 5.1/7.1 sur-  
round analog audio outputs.  
These coaxial and optical digital audio inputs can be  
used to connect CD, DVD, or LD (laser disc) play-  
ers and other components with digital audio outputs.  
B DIGITAL OUT OPT 1 & 2 (35)  
These optical digital audio outputs can be used to  
connect a CD recorder or other digital recorder with  
digital inputs.  
F AM ANTENNA (24)  
These push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna.  
C PRE OUT—FRONT L/R, SUB, CENTER,  
SURR L/R (36)  
G FM ANTENNA (24)  
This connector is for connecting an FM antenna.  
If you use the DTR-8.4 as a preamp, these analog  
audio outputs can be connected to the inputs on a  
separate power amp. The SUB output is used to  
connect a powered subwoofer.  
H PHONO IN (35)  
These analog inputs can be used to connect a turnta-  
ble with a moving-magnet cartridge.  
I CD IN (34)  
D PRE OUT—SURR BACK/ZONE 2 (36, 84)  
These analog audio outputs can be used to feed the  
L/R surround back inputs on a separate power amp  
when the DTR-8.4 is used as a preamp, or to feed a  
power amp in Zone 2.  
These analog inputs can be used to connect a CD  
player with analog outputs.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 13 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Front & Rear Panels—Continued  
J TAPE IN/OUT (34)  
T RS232 (37)  
These analog inputs and outputs can be used to con-  
nect a cassette recorder, Mini Disc recorder, or other  
recorder with analog inputs and outputs.  
This port is for connecting the DTR-8.4 to home  
automation and external controllers.  
U IR IN/OUT (85)  
K MONITOR OUT (27)  
If you want to use the remote controller to control  
the DTR-8.4 from Zone 2, or if the DTR-8.4 is  
installed in a cabinet and the line of sight between  
the DTR-8.4 and the remote controller is obstructed,  
a commercially available IR receiver can be con-  
nected to the IR IN. A commercially available IR  
emitter can be connected to the IR OUT to pass the  
IR signals along to another AV component.  
This S-Video or composite video output can be con-  
nected to the video input on your TV or projector.  
L ZONE 2 OUT (84)  
These composite video and analog audio outputs  
can be used to feed a TV and an integrated amp in  
Zone 2.  
M DVD IN (28)  
V 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2/A/B (68, 85)  
These outputs can be connected to the 12-volt trig-  
ger inputs on other components. They output 12  
volts (100 milliamperes max). The ZONE 2 TRIG-  
GER OUT outputs 12 volts while the DTR-8.4 is in  
Zone 2 mode. The A and B outputs can be assigned  
to input sources, in which case, the assigned trigger  
output outputs 12 volts while the input source is  
selected.  
These S-Video, composite video, and analog audio  
inputs can be used to connect a DVD player.  
N VIDEO 1 & 2 IN/OUT (29, 31)  
These S-Video, composite video, and analog audio  
inputs and outputs can be used to connect one or  
two video recorders (e.g., VCRs).  
O VIDEO 3 & 4 IN (31)  
These S-Video, composite video, and analog audio  
inputs can be used to connect one or two video  
sources (e.g., cable TV, satellite TV, or a set-top  
box).  
W
REMOTE CONTROL (36)  
This  
(Remote Interactive) socket can be con-  
nected to the  
socket on another Integra/Onkyo  
P COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT (27)  
This component video output can be used to con-  
nect a TV or projector with a component video  
input.  
AV component. The DTR-8.4’s remote controller  
can then be used to control that component. To use  
, you must make an analog RCA/phono audio  
connection between the DTR-8.4 and the other AV  
component, even if they are connected digitally.  
Q COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 1 & 2 (28, 30, 32)  
These component video inputs can be used to con-  
nect one or two AV components with component  
video outputs, such as a DVD player.  
X AC INLET (37)  
The supplied power cord should be connected here.  
Y AC OUTLETS (37)  
R ETHERNET (Net-Tune) (76)  
This port is for connecting the DTR-8.4 to your  
Ethernet network (i.e., router or switch) for use with  
Net-Tune (i.e., Internet radio and MP3 and WAV  
playback).  
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply  
power to other AV components. The connector type  
depends on the country in which you purchased  
your DTR-8.4.  
Z Grounding screw (35)  
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground  
wire.  
S SPEAKERS (23)  
These terminal posts are for connecting your speak-  
ers. The SURR BACK/ZONE 2 terminals can be  
used with surround back speakers in the main room  
or speakers in another room (Zone 2).  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 14 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller  
The DTR-8.4’s remote controller is a multipurpose  
device that can be used to control not just the DTR-8.4  
but your other AV components as well. This section  
explains how it’s various operating modes can be used to  
M Surround button (59)  
This button is used to select the Dolby and DTS lis-  
tening modes.  
N Direct button (59)  
This button is used to select the Direct listening  
mode.  
control the DTR-8.4 and various  
-compatible Inte-  
gra/Onkyo components. See page 88 for information on  
using the remote controller to control Integra/Onkyo  
O Pure A button (59)  
components without  
and TVs, VCRs, and AV com-  
This button is used to select the Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode.  
ponents made by other manufacturers.  
For detailed information, refer to the pages in parenthe-  
sis.  
Scroll wheel  
Amp Mode  
Amp mode is used to control the DTR-8.4. To select  
Amp mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears  
on the display.  
A
R
B
Note:  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the input  
source and remote controller mode simultaneously.  
Boxed numbers are for Net-Tune mode (page 15).  
C
1
A On button (38)  
This button is used to turn on the DTR-8.4.  
B Standby button (38)  
S
This button is used to set the DTR-8.4 to Standby.  
D
E
F
G
C Number/letter buttons (54, 55, 73)  
T
U
These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters.  
D Custom button (88)  
This button is used to access various settings that  
you can use to customize the operation of the  
remote controller.  
2
VC  
W
E Macro button (96)  
3H  
4I  
This button is used with the Macro function.  
F Mode button  
X
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes.  
J
K
Y
Z
G Dimmer button (52)  
This button is used to adjust the display brightness.  
5
H Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &  
Enter buttons  
6
7
D
E
These buttons are used to select items on the  
onscreen setup menus (OSD). The Enter button is  
also used to enter names and to confirm settings.  
F
L
M
N
a
b
c
I CH/Disc button (55)  
This button is used to select radio presets.  
8O  
9
0
J Return/Exit button  
G
H
This button is used to return to the previously dis-  
played onscreen setup menu (OSD).  
P
K Display button (61)  
I
J
d
e
A
This button is used to display various information  
about the currently selected input source.  
Q
B
L THX button (59)  
This button is used to select the THX listening  
modes.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 15 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
P Test Tone, CH SEL, Level– & Level+ buttons  
(44)  
e L Night button (62)  
This button is used to set the Late Night function.  
These buttons are used to adjust the level of each  
speaker individually. These functions can be set  
only with the remote controller. The [Level–] and  
[Level+] buttons are also used to adjust the volume  
in Zone 2.  
Net-Tune Mode  
Net-Tune mode is used with the Net-Tune functions. To  
select Net-Tune mode, press the [Mode] button, and  
then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T” appears on  
the display.  
Q Audio SEL button (53)  
This button is used to select the audio input signal  
format: analog, digital, or multichannel.  
Note:  
R Light button  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously. (e.g., set the  
input source to “MSRV/IRD” and the mode to  
“NET-T.”)  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
S Direct Tuning button (54)  
This button is used with the number buttons to  
select a radio station by entering its frequency. Press  
this button first, and then use the number buttons to  
enter the frequency.  
1Number/letter buttons (80)  
These buttons are used to enter numbers and letters  
when searching for music in your network audio  
server music library.  
T Display  
The top line of this LCD display shows the name of  
the currently selected input source. The bottom line  
shows the currently selected remote controller  
mode.  
2Mode button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “NET-T”  
appears on the display.  
U Zone 2 button (87)  
This button is used when you want to set the volume  
and input source for Zone 2.  
3Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &  
Enter buttons  
V Input button (51)  
These buttons are used to navigate Internet radio  
and network audio server menus. The Enter button  
is used to confirm items and to start playback of  
Net-Tune server tracks.  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
the name of the input source appears on the display.  
W Sleep button (52)  
4CH/Disc button (78)  
This button is used to set the Sleep function. This  
function can be set only with the remote controller.  
This button is used to select Internet radio presets.  
5Play [ ] button (80)  
X VOL button (51)  
This button is used to start playback of network  
audio server tracks.  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4.  
6Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons (79)  
Y Setup/guide button (39)  
The Previous [  
vious track. During playback it selects the begin-  
ning of the current track. The Next [  
used to select the next track.  
] button is used to select the pre-  
This button is used to access the onscreen setup  
menus (OSD) that appear on the TV.  
] button is  
Z Muting button (52)  
This button is used to mute the DTR-8.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
7Pause [ ] button (79)  
This button is used to pause playback.  
a All CH ST button (59)  
This button is used to select the All Ch Stereo listen-  
ing mode.  
8Repeat button (80)  
This button is used for repeat playback.  
9Album button (79)  
b Stereo button (59)  
This button is used to select the Stereo listening  
mode.  
This button is used to search your network audio  
server music library by album.  
0Playlist button (79)  
c [ DSP] & [DSP ] buttons (59)  
These buttons are used to select the DSP (digital  
signal processor) listening modes.  
This button is used to search your network audio  
server library by playlist.  
d Re-EQ button (62)  
This button is used to turn on and off the Re-EQ  
function.  
(continued...)  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 16 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “DVD.”)  
ACaps button (80)  
This button is used to select lowercase letters,  
uppercase letters, and numbers when searching for  
network audio server music by album, artist, or  
playlist.  
A On button  
This button is used to turn on the DVD player.  
B Standby button  
BDelete button (80)  
This button is used to set the DVD player to  
Standby.  
This button is used to delete characters entered with  
the number/letter buttons.  
C Number/letter buttons  
CInput button (77, 79)  
These buttons are used to enter title, chapter, and  
track numbers and to enter times for locating spe-  
cific points in time.  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“MSRV” (network audio server) or “IRD” (Internet  
Radio) appears on the display.  
D Mode button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “DVD” appears  
on the display.  
DFR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons (79)  
The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse. The  
FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.  
EStop [ ] button (79)  
E Top Menu button  
This button is used to stop playback.  
This button is used to select a DVD’s top menu.  
FRandom button (80)  
F Up/Down/Left/Right [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] &  
Enter buttons  
This button is used for random playback.  
GArtist button (79)  
These buttons are used to navigate DVD menus and  
the DVD player’s onscreen setup menus. The Enter  
button is used to start playback of the selected menu  
title, chapter, or track and to confirm settings.  
This button is used to search your network audio  
server music library by artist.  
HGenre button (77, 79)  
G CH/Disc button  
This button is used to search your network audio  
server music library by genre, and to search for  
Internet radio stations by genre.  
This button is used to select discs on a DVD  
changer.  
ILocation button (77)  
H Return/Exit button  
This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-  
tions by country.  
This button is used to exit the DVD player’s  
onscreen setup menu and to restart menu playback.  
JLanguage button (77)  
I Display button  
This button is used to search for Internet radio sta-  
tions by language.  
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc, title, chapter, or track, including the  
elapsed time, remaining time, total time, and so on.  
Connecting your  
player, CD player, MiniDisc recorder, or cassette  
recorder to the DTR-8.4’s  
trol it with the DTR-8.4’s remote controller. You only  
need to point the remote controller at the DTR-8.4. See  
page 36 for connection information.  
-compatible Integra/Onkyo DVD  
J Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons  
The Previous [  
vious chapter or track. During playback it selects  
the beginning of the current chapter or track. The  
] button is used to select the pre-  
socket allows you to con-  
Next [  
] button is used to select the next chapter  
or track.  
To use the  
function, you must make an  
connec-  
K FR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons  
tion and an analog RCA/phono audio connection  
between the AV component and your DTR-8.4, even if  
they are connected digitally.  
The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse. The  
FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.  
L Pause [ ] button  
This button is used to pause DVD playback.  
DVD Mode  
M Step/Slow [ ]/[ ] buttons  
These buttons are used for frame-by-frame playback  
and slow-motion playback.  
DVD mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo DVD  
player connected to the DTR-8.4 via  
.To select DVD  
mode, press the [Mode] button, and then roll the  
N Subtitle button  
scroll wheel until “DVD” appears on the display.  
This button is used to select subtitles.  
Note:  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 17 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
R Open/Close [ ] button  
Scroll wheel  
This button is used to open and close the disc tray.  
S Light button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
T Input button  
A
B
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“DVD” appears on the display.  
S
f
U Menu button  
This button is used to select a DVD’s menu.  
C
V VOL button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4.  
W Setup/Guide button  
This button is used to access the DVD player’s  
onscreen setup menus.  
X Muting button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-8.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
T
U
D
E
Y Play [ ] button  
This button is used to start DVD playback.  
F
V
W
Z Stop [ ] button  
G
H
I
J
This button is used to stop DVD playback.  
a Random button  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
X
Y
b Angle button  
This button is used to select different camera angles.  
K
Z
c Last Memory button  
L
M
N
O
This button is used with the last memory function,  
which allows you to resume DVD playback from  
where you left off.  
a
b
c
d Memory button  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
titles, chapters, or tracks.  
P
Q
d
e
e Search button  
R
This button is used to search for titles, chapters,  
tracks, and specific points in time.  
f Clear button  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
O Audio button  
This button is used to select foreign language  
soundtracks and audio formats (e.g., Dolby Digital  
or DTS).  
P Repeat button  
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
Q A-B button  
This button is used to set the A–B repeat playback  
function.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 18 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
CD Mode  
CD mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo CD player  
Boxed numbers are for MiniDisc mode (page 19).  
connected to the DTR-8.4 via  
. To select CD mode,  
A On button  
press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel until “CD” appears on the display.  
This button is used to set the CD player to On or  
Standby.  
Note:  
B Number/letter buttons  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “CD.”)  
These buttons are used to enter track numbers and  
to enter times for locating specific points in time.  
C Mode button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “CD” appears on  
the display.  
Scroll wheel  
D CH/Disc button  
This button is used to select discs on a CD changer.  
1
E Display button  
A
K
S
A
I
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,  
remaining time, total time, and so on.  
F Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons  
2
B
The Previous [  
vious track. During playback it selects the begin-  
ning of the current track. The Next [  
used to select the next track.  
] button is used to select the pre-  
] button is  
G FR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons  
The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse. The  
FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.  
H Pause [ ] button  
LB  
3
4
3
This button is used to pause CD playback.  
I Repeat button  
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
C
M
J Open/Close [ ] button  
This button is used to open and close the disc tray.  
K Light button  
4
5
5
6
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
ND  
O
E
L Input button  
7
8
6
PF  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“CD” appears on the display.  
7
8
Q
G
M VOL button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4.  
R
H
9
J
9
0
N Muting button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-8.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
O Play [ ] button  
This button is used to start CD playback.  
P Stop [ ] button  
This button is used to stop CD playback.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 19 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
Q Random button  
0Eject [ ] button  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
This button is used to set eject the MiniDisc.  
ALight button  
R Memory button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
tracks.  
BInput button  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
“MD” appears on the display.  
S Clear button  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
CVOL button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4.  
MiniDisc Mode  
DMuting button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-8.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
MiniDisc mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo  
MiniDisc recorder connected to the DTR-8.4 via  
select MiniDisc mode, press the [Mode] button, and  
then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on the  
display.  
.To  
EPlay [ ] button  
This button is used to start MiniDisc playback.  
FStop [ ] button  
This button is used to stop MiniDisc playback.  
Note:  
GRandom button  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “MD.”)  
This button is used with the random playback func-  
tion.  
HMemory button  
This button is used with the memory playback func-  
tion, which allows you to create a custom playlist of  
tracks.  
1On button  
This button is used to set the MiniDisc recorder to  
On or Standby.  
IClear button  
2Number/letter buttons  
This button is used to cancel functions and to clear  
entered numbers.  
These buttons are used to enter track numbers and  
to enter times for locating specific points in time.  
3Mode button  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press this button first,  
and then roll the scroll wheel until “MD” appears on  
the display.  
4Display button  
This button is used to display information about the  
current disc or track, including the elapsed time,  
remaining time, total time, and so on.  
5Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons  
The Previous [  
] button is used to select the pre-  
vious track. During playback it selects the begin-  
ning of the current track. The Next [  
used to select the next track.  
] button is  
6FR/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons  
The FR [ ] button is used to start fast reverse. The  
FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.  
7Pause [ ] button  
This button is used to pause MiniDisc playback.  
8Rec [ ] button  
This button is used to start MiniDisc recording.  
9Repeat button  
This button is used to set the repeat playback func-  
tions.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 20 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Remote Controller—Continued  
A Mode button  
Tape Mode  
This button is used with the scroll wheel to select  
the remote controller modes. Press the scroll wheel  
until “AMP” appears on the display.  
Tape mode is used to control an Integra/Onkyo cassette  
recorder connected to the DTR-8.4 via  
. To select  
Tape mode, press the scroll wheel. “AMP” appears  
on the display.  
B Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons  
The Previous [  
] button is used to select the pre-  
Note:  
vious track. During playback it selects the begin-  
While neither the [Input] button nor [Mode] button is  
illuminated, the scroll wheel changes the input source  
and remote controller mode simultaneously (e.g., set the  
input source and mode to “TAPE.”)  
ning of the current track. The Next [  
used to select the next track.  
] button is  
The Previous/Next [  
]/[  
] buttons make not  
work properly with some cassette tapes depending  
on how they were recorded.  
Scroll wheel  
C Rewind/FF [ ]/[ ] buttons  
The Rewind [ ] button is used to start rewind. The  
FF [ ] button is used to start fast forward.  
D Rec [ ] button  
This button is used to start tape recording.  
E
E Light button  
This button is used to turn on or off the remote con-  
troller’s illuminated buttons.  
F Input button  
This button is used to select the input source. Press  
this button first, and then roll the scroll wheel until  
TAPE” appears on the display.  
G VOL button  
This button is used to set the volume of the  
DTR-8.4.  
H Muting button  
This button is used to mute the DTR-8.4. This func-  
tion can be set only with the remote controller.  
F
G
A
I Play [ ] button  
This button is used to start tape playback.  
J Stop [ ] button  
This button is used to stop tape playback.  
K Reverse Play [ ] button  
This button is used to start reverse playback.  
8
9
2
3
J
K
4
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 21 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
About Home Theater  
Enjoying Home Theater  
With the DTR-8.4’s superb functionality you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your own  
home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall.  
For best results with DVDs that feature THX Surround EX, use a THX-certified THX speaker system.  
With DVDs you can enjoy DTS, Dolby Digital, and THX soundtracks. With TV and satellite broadcasts you can enjoy  
Integra’s own DSP surround listening modes.  
Front left and right speakers  
These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a  
solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the lis-  
tener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV. Angle them inward so  
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.  
Surround back speakers  
These speakers further  
Center speaker  
This speaker enhances the front left  
and right speakers, making sound  
movements distinct and providing a  
full sound image. In movies it’s used  
mainly for dialog.  
Position it close to yourTV (preferably  
on top) facing forward at about ear  
level, or at the same height as the  
front left and right speakers.  
enhance the realism of sur-  
round sound and improve  
sound localization behind the  
listener. Position them behind  
the listener about 3 feet  
(100 cm) above ear level.  
Subwoofer  
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds  
of the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)  
channel. Position it in a corner or one-  
third of the way along the front wall.  
Surround left and right speakers  
These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add real-  
istic ambience. Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly  
behind, about 3 feet (100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they should be  
equidistant from the listener.  
Speaker Configuration  
For the best surround-sound experience, you should connect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.  
The following table indicates the channels you should use depending on the number of speakers that you have.  
Number of speakers:  
Front left  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front right  
Center  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered subwoofer is recommended for a really powerful and solid bass  
sound.  
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you need to specify the distance between the listener and each indi-  
vidual speaker so that the sound from each speaker arrives at the listener’s ears at the same time (see page 43). In  
addition, you need to calibrate the level of each speaker individually to achieve the correct balance (see page 44.)  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 22 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4  
experiment by placing your subwoofer at various posi-  
tions within your room and choose the one that provides  
the most satisfying results at your listening position.  
PositioningYour Speakers  
This section explains how to position your speakers. The  
picture on page 21 shows the general speaker positions.  
Using Dipole Speakers  
Front Left & Right Speakers  
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and  
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole  
speakers output the same sound in two directions.  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them  
to indicate how they should be positioned. The surround  
left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned so that  
their arrows point toward the TV/screen, while the sur-  
round left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned  
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.  
The front left and right speakers should be positioned  
facing the listener at about ear level, and equidistant  
from the TV. Angle them inward so as to create a trian-  
gle, with the listener at the apex.  
Center Speaker  
The center speaker should be positioned close to your  
TV (preferably on top) facing forward at about ear level,  
or at the same height as the front left and right speakers.  
Normal speakers  
Dipole speakers  
1
TV/screen  
TV/screen  
1
Surround Left & Right Speakers  
4
2
3
4
2
3
The surround left and right speakers should be posi-  
tioned at the sides of the listener, or slightly behind,  
about 3 feet (100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they  
should be equidistant from the listener.  
5
6
5
6
Surround Back Left & Right Speakers  
The surround back left and right speakers are necessary  
to enjoy Dolby Digital EX, THX Surround EX, DTS-ES  
Matrix, and DTS-ES Discrete.  
7
8
7
8
Position them behind the lis-  
tener about 3 feet (100 cm)  
above ear level.  
They should be equidistant  
1. Subwoofer  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
6. Surround right speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
60˚  
from the listener, creating a  
triangle. Make sure that the  
angle at the apex of the trian-  
gle is about 60 degrees. This  
Attaching the Speaker Labels  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
Surround  
back right  
speaker  
is recommended by THX.  
The DTR-8.4’s positive (+) speaker terminals are color-  
coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)  
speaker terminals are all black.)  
Subwoofer  
The volume and quality of the bass output from your  
subwoofer will depend on its position, the shape of your  
listening room, and your listening position. In general,  
the best bass sound can be obtained by putting the sub-  
woofer in a front corner or one-third of the way along the  
front wall.  
Speaker terminal  
Front left  
Color  
White  
Red  
Front right  
Center  
Green  
Blue  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround back/Zone 2 left  
Surround back/Zone 2 right  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you  
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each  
speaker cable in accordance with the above table.All you  
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the  
corresponding speaker terminal.  
Corner  
1/3 room  
length  
To find the best position for your subwoofer, while play-  
ing a movie or some music with a good bass sound,  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 23 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Read the following before connecting your speakers:  
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. In other  
words, connect positive (+) terminals to only positive  
(+) terminals, and negative (–) terminals to only nega-  
tive (–) terminals. If you get them the wrong way  
around, the sound will be out of phase and will sound  
unnatural.  
The following illustration shows which speaker should  
be connected to each pair of terminals.  
Front right  
speaker  
Center  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
• Only connect speakers with an impedance of between  
4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any one speaker is  
between 4 and 6 ohms, be sure to select the 4 ohms  
setting on the DTR-8.4 (see page 40).  
• Unnecessarily long, or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
• Be careful not to short the  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
R
L
R
L
positive and negative wires.  
Doing so may damage the  
DTR-8.4.  
SURR  
BACK  
ZONE  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
2
SPEAKERS  
R
L
• Don’t connect more than one  
cable to each speaker termi-  
nal. Doing so may damage the  
DTR-8.4.  
Surround  
right  
speaker  
Surround  
left  
speaker  
• If you want to connect a single speaker instead of a  
pair, don’t connect it to the left and right terminals.  
Surround  
back right  
speaker  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
R
L
R
L
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer  
Using a suitable cable, connect the DTR-8.4’s PRE OUT  
SUB output to the powered subwoofer’s input, as shown.  
If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re using an  
external amp, connect the PRE OUT SUB output to the  
amp’s input.  
Connecting the Speaker Cables  
Strip about 5/8" (15 mm)  
of insulation from the  
ends of the speaker  
5/8" (15 mm)  
1
Powered  
subwoofer  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
cables, and twist the bare  
wires tightly, as shown.  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
MONITOR  
OUT  
1
2
3
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
SURR  
AUDIO  
SURR  
R
L
L
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
TUNER  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
L
2
3
4
AUDIO  
R
R
LINE INPUT  
Unscrew the terminal.  
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
2
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
IN  
2
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
LINE INPUT  
Fully insert the bare  
wires.  
PRE OUT  
SUB  
3
Screw the terminal tight.  
4
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 24 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead (see page 25).  
Connecting Antenna  
This chapter explains how to connect the supplied indoor  
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect  
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.  
The DTR-8.4 won’t pick up any radio signals without  
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna  
to use the tuner.  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna  
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
AM antenna push terminals  
FM antenna connector  
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting  
the tabs into the base, as shown.  
1
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
OUT  
1
2
3
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 8.4  
RATING: AC120V 60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
R
L
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
I
R
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12  
V
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Connect both wires of the AM loop  
antenna to the AM push terminals, as  
shown.  
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna  
2
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so  
they can be connected either way around).  
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and  
that the push terminals are gripping the bare  
wires, not the insulation.  
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.  
1
U.S.A. and Canadian Models  
FM  
75  
Insert the plug fully  
into the socket.  
Australian Model  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
FM  
75  
AM  
Insert the plug fully  
into the socket.  
Once your DTR-8.4 is ready for use, you’ll need  
to tune into an FM radio station and adjust the  
position of the FM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Once your DTR-8.4 is ready for use, you’ll need  
to tune into an AM radio station and adjust the  
position of the AM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from  
your DTR-8.4, TV, speaker cables, and power  
cords.  
Use thumbtacks or something similar to  
fix the FM antenna into position.  
2
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-  
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 25).  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself  
when using thumbtacks.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 25 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna  
Move the small wire inside the adapter  
from position A to position B, as shown.  
3
4
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead.  
Position A  
Wire  
Position B  
FM  
75  
Insert the central conductor (1), as  
shown, and use a small pair of pliers to  
clamp the shielding and outer insulation  
sections of the cable (2), as shown.  
1
Notes:  
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable  
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an  
attic or loft.  
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well  
away for tall buildings, preferably with a clear line of  
sight to your local FM transmitter.  
2
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-  
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.  
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated  
well away from power lines and other high-voltage  
equipment.  
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance  
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-  
ards.  
Make sure the shielding is not touching the central  
conductor.  
Refit the adapter’s cover, and then plug  
the adapter into the 75 socket.  
5
Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter  
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV  
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-  
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as  
shown.  
Using the 75/300-ohm Antenna Adapter  
(Australian model only)  
The 75/300-ohm antenna adapter can be used to connect  
an FM antenna using either 75-ohm coaxial cable or  
300-ohm twin-core flat cable.  
Connecting 300-ohm Flat Cable  
Using a screwdriver, loosen the  
TV/FM antenna splitter  
1
two screws on the adapter, wrap  
the bare wires around the  
screws, and then retighten them,  
as shown.  
To AV receiver  
To TV (or VCR)  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna  
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied  
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in  
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.  
Plug the adapter into the 75 socket.  
2
Outdoor antenna (aerial)  
Connecting 75-ohm Coaxial Cable  
Strip and prepare the  
75 ohm coaxial cable,  
as shown.  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
15 mm  
1
6
3
6
mm mm mm  
1/4" 1/8" 1/4"  
AM  
5/8"  
Using your fingernails or a small screw-  
driver, lever the adapter’s tabs outward  
and remove the cover, as shown.  
2
Outdoor AM antennas work best when installed outside  
horizontally, but good results can sometimes be obtained  
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note  
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.  
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with  
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 26 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
RCA/phono AV Connection Color Coding  
Before Making Any Connections  
RCA/phono AV connections are usually color coded:  
red, white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-  
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).  
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and  
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to  
connect composite video inputs and outputs.  
• Read the manuals supplied with your AV components.  
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed  
all audio and video connections.  
Optical Digital Inputs  
The DTR-8.4’s optical digital inputs have shutter-type  
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted, and  
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Analog audio  
Right (red)  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
Left (white)  
Composite video  
(Yellow)  
(Yellow)  
Right!  
• Push plugs in all the way to make  
good connections (loose connec-  
tions can cause noise or malfunc-  
tions).  
• To prevent interference, keep  
audio and video cables away from  
power cords and speaker cables.  
Wrong!  
AV Cables & Sockets  
Video  
Cable  
Socket  
Description  
P
R
B
P
P
R
B
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best  
picture quality. Some TV manufacturers label their  
component video sockets differently.  
Y
Component  
video cable  
P
Y
PB  
Y
PR  
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals  
and provides better picture quality than composite  
video.  
S VIDEO  
S-Video cable  
Composite video is the most common video con-  
nection format and is found on virtually all TVs,  
VCRs, and video equipment.  
VIDEO  
Composite  
video cable  
Audio  
Cable  
Socket  
Description  
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).  
The audio quality is the same as for coaxial.  
OPT  
Optical digital  
audio cable  
Offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy surround sound (e.g., Dolby Digital, DTS).  
The audio quality is the same as for optical.  
COAX  
Coaxial digital  
audio cable  
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most com-  
mon connection format for analog audio, and can be  
found on virtually all AV components.  
AUDIO  
Analog audio  
cable (RCA/  
phono)  
R
L
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and  
it’s typically used to connect DVD players with  
individual 5.1/7.1 analog audio outputs. Several  
normal analog audio cables can be used as an alter-  
native to a multichannel cable.  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
Multichannel  
analog audio  
cable (RCA/  
phono)  
SURR  
R
L
SURR  
BACK  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 27 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Depending on the type of video input on your TV, choose  
one of the following connection methods.  
ConnectingYour TV or Projector  
The DTR-8.4 offers several connection formats for com-  
patibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The for-  
mat you choose will depend on the formats supported by  
your AV components. Use the following section as a  
guide.  
Using Composite Video  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT to a composite video input on  
your TV, as shown.  
VIDEO  
MONITOR  
Video Connection Formats  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
OUT  
OMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
Video equipment can be connected to the DTR-8.4 using  
the following video connection formats: composite  
video, S-Video, or component video, the latter offering  
the best picture quality.  
The following diagram shows that composite video input  
signals are output by composite video and S-Video out-  
puts, and that S-Video input signals are output by  
S-Video and composite video outputs.  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
If you connect a video source to a component video  
input, you’ll need to connect your TV or projector to the  
component video output. Normally, component video  
input #1 or #2 feeds the component video output. How-  
ever, you can configure the DTR-8.4 to output composite  
video and S-Video input signals as component video (see  
“Component Video Setup” on page 47).  
Using S-Video  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT to an S-Video input on your  
TV, as shown.  
S VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD player,  
etc.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
MPONE
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OU
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
Composite S-Video  
Composite S-Video  
Component  
Component  
Output  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
S VIDEO IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
DTR-8.4  
TAPE  
page 47  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Composite S-Video  
Composite S-Video  
Component  
Component  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
OUT  
Input  
TV,  
projector,  
etc.  
Using Component Video  
Use a component video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
COMPONENTVIDEO OUTPUT to a component video  
input on your TV, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
OUTPUT  
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
Y
SURR  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
PB  
PR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
Y
PB  
PR  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 28 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Audio Connections  
Connecting a DVD Player  
Using Coaxial or Optical Connections  
• Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX 1 to the coaxial out-  
put on your DVD player, as shown.  
Video Connections  
You only need to use one of the following connection  
methods.  
OR  
Using Composite Video  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO DVD IN to the composite video output on your  
DVD player, as shown.  
• Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 1, 2, 3, or 4 to the opti-  
cal output on your DVD player, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
OPT  
1
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
ANTENNA  
1
2
3
OUT  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
Y
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
IN  
DVD  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
P
CR  
AM  
OUT  
ZONE  
2
PB  
SURR  
PR  
SURR  
DIGITAL  
IN  
COAX  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
SURR  
ZONE  
2
R
L
FM  
75  
2
3
4
BACK/  
OPT  
1
NPUT 1  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
AUDIO  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
SUB  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
IN  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
2
IN  
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
2
CD  
INPUT 2  
Y
SURR  
IN  
CD  
R
L
OUT  
IN  
OPT  
1
R
L
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
OPT  
1
SURR  
BACK  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
TAPE  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
GND  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Connect one or the other  
VIDEO OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
DVD player  
Using S-Video  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO DVD IN to the S-Video output on your DVD  
player, as shown.  
DVD player  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
IN  
DVD  
R
L
Initially, the COAX 1 digital input is assigned to the  
DVD input source. If you connect your DVD player to a  
different digital input, you’ll need to reassign the DVD  
input source (see page 45).  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
Using Analog Connections  
Even if your DVD player is connected digitally (coaxial  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
or optical), to use  
, or to record audio from your  
DVD player, you’ll need to make analog connections as  
well.  
S VIDEO OUT  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO DVD IN L/R inputs to the analog  
audio outputs on your DVD player, as shown.  
If your DVD player has left, right, and multichannel out-  
puts, be sure to use the left and right outputs.  
DVD player  
Using Component Video  
Use a component video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 1 to the component  
video output on your DVD player, as shown.  
Your TV must also be connected via component video.  
R
L
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
SURR  
INPUT 1  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
SURR  
IN  
AM  
R
L
BACK/  
OUT  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
SURR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
SURR  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
AUDIO  
L
ZONE  
2
R
L
FM  
75  
R
OUT  
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
PB  
PR  
IN  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
AUDIO  
R
L
CD  
R
L
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
R
L
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
2
SURR  
BACK  
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
TAPE  
CD  
IN  
2
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
R
L
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
DVD player  
DVD player  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 29 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Using Multichannel Connections  
Connecting a VCR for Playback  
If your player supports multichannel audio formats such  
as DVD-Audio, and it has multichannel analog audio  
outputs, you can enjoy DVD-Audio playback.  
Use a multichannel analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to  
connect the DTR-8.4’s MULTI CH INPUT FRONT L/R,  
SUB, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R to  
the 5.1 or 7.1 analog outputs on your DVD player, as  
shown. Alternatively, use several analog audio cables  
(RCA/phono).  
You can play a video from a VCR via the DTR-8.4.  
Video Connections  
• Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO VIDEO 1 IN to the S-Video output on your  
VCR, as shown.  
OR  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO VIDEO 1 IN to a composite video output on  
your VCR, as shown.  
An S-Video connection provides better picture quality  
than a composite video connection.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPU
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
2
INPU
Y
SURR  
Audio Connections  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
SURR  
2
IN  
• Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect  
the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO VIDEO 1 IN L/R inputs to the  
analog audio outputs on your VCR, as shown.  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
L
SURR  
BACK  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
FRONT  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
ONO  
OUT  
IN  
N  
2
R
L
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
SUB  
CENTER  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
SURR  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
R
L
SURR  
BACK  
R
L
VIDEO 1  
IN  
Connect one  
or the other  
DVD player  
R
L
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO OUT  
S VIDEO OUT  
VCR  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 30 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Connecting a D-VHS VCR for  
Playback  
Video Connections  
Audio Connections  
Use a component video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 2 to the component  
video output on your D-VHS VCR, as shown.  
Your TV must also be connected via component video.  
A component video connection provides better picture  
quality than an S-Video connection.  
• Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 1, 2, 3, or 4 to the opti-  
cal output on your D-VHS VCR, as shown.  
OR  
• Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX 2 or 3 to the coaxial  
output on your D-VHS VCR, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
INPUT 2  
Y
OPT  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
1
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
CENTER  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
AM  
ANTENNA  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
IN  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
SURR  
COAX  
1
R
L
CENTER  
SURR  
AM  
IN  
DVD  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
PB  
PR  
FM  
75  
2
3
4
OUT  
IN  
SURR  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
PB  
PR  
R
L
3
4
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
AUDIO  
FM  
75  
R
L
OUT  
IN  
SUB  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
HONO  
OUT  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
AUDIO  
L
R
L
R
CD  
SUB  
CENTER  
IN  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
2
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
BACK  
CD  
TAPE  
IN  
2
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
GND  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
SURR  
BACK  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
TAPE  
2
IN  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Y
Connect one or the other  
PB  
PR  
DIGITAL OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
OPTICAL  
D-VHS VCR  
D-VHS VCR  
You might need to change the digital input-to-input  
source assignments (page 45).  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 31 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
VCR  
Connecting a VCR for Recording  
This section shows how to connect a VCR for recording  
from a TV or another VCR.  
S VIDEO OUT  
S VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
Video Connections  
R
L
R
L
• Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO VIDEO 1 OUT to an S-Video input on your  
recordingVCR. Use another S-Video cable to connect  
the DTR-8.4’s S VIDEO VIDEO 3 IN to an S-Video  
output on your TV or playback VCR, as shown.  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
OR  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO VIDEO 1 OUT to a composite video input on  
your recording VCR. Use another composite video  
cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s VIDEO VIDEO 3 IN  
to a composite video output on your TV or playback  
VCR, as shown.  
Connect one  
or the other  
OUT  
E OUT  
L  
COM  
V
R
L
VIDEO 1  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
MONITOR  
OUT  
R
L
IN  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
M  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
R
Audio Connections  
2
3
4
AUDIO  
R
L
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
SURR  
CD  
• Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect  
the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO VIDEO 1 L/R OUTs to the  
audio inputs on your recording VCR.  
IN  
L
OUT  
R
L
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
TAPE  
IN  
IN  
VIDEO 3  
IN  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
• Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect  
the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO VIDEO 3 L/R IN inputs to the  
audio outputs on your TV or playback VCR.  
Connect one  
or the other  
Playback from the Recording VCR  
To enjoy playback from the recording VCR through the  
DTR-8.4, use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO VIDEO 1 IN input to an S-Video output on  
your recording VCR, or use a composite video cable to  
connect the DTR-8.4’s VIDEO VIDEO 1 IN input to a  
composite video output on your recording VCR, and use  
an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO VIDEO 1 L/R IN inputs to the audio  
outputs on your recording VCR.  
R
L
S VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
:
:
For recording  
For playback  
or VCR, etc.  
TV  
Notes:  
• The DTR-8.4 must be turned On for recording.  
Recording is not possible while it’s in Standby mode.  
• If you want to record directly from your TV or play-  
back VCR to your recording VCR without going  
through the DTR-8.4, connect your TV/VCR’s audio  
and video outputs directly to your recording VCR’s  
AV inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV and  
VCR for details.  
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs  
can only be recorded via composite video outputs. If  
your TV and video playback components are con-  
nected via composite video, you must connect your  
recordingVCR via composite video as well. Similarly,  
video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be  
recorded via S-Video outputs. If your TV and video  
playback components are connected via S-Video, you  
must connect your recording VCR via S-Video as  
well.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 32 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Using Component Video  
Connecting Other Video Sources—  
TV, Satellite, Cable, Set-top box, LD  
Player, etc.  
Use a component video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT 1 or 2 to the component  
video output on your video source, as shown.  
COMPONENT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
Video Connections  
ANTENNA  
VIDEO  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
SUB  
INPUT 2  
Y
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
You only need to use one of the following connection  
methods.  
If you just want to listen to the audio from your TV via  
the DTR-8.4 with surround sound, no video connections  
are necessary, just make an audio connection.  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
4
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
UB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
D  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Using Composite Video  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO VIDEO 3 or 4 IN to the composite video output  
on your video source, as shown.  
Y
PB  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
PR  
Satellite, cable, set-top  
box, LD player, etc.  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
IN  
IN  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
SURR  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
Audio Connections  
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
T  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
Using Coaxial or Optical Connections  
• Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX , 2, or 3 to the coaxial  
output on your video source, as shown.  
OR  
• Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 3 to the optical output  
on your video source, as shown.  
VIDEO OUT  
Satellite, cable, set-top  
box, LD player, etc.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
OPT  
1
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
DIGITAL  
IN  
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
ZONE  
2
PB  
SURR  
COAX  
SURR  
1
2
3
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPU
Y
ZONE  
2
2
3
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
Using S-Video  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
S VIDEO VIDEO 3 or 4 IN to the S-Video output on  
your video source, as shown.  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
VIDEO 3  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
Connect one or the other  
SURR  
VIDEO 4  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
TV, Satellite, cable, set-top box, LD player, etc.  
Notes:  
You may need to change the digital input-to-input  
source assignments (see page 45).  
• To connect the DTR-8.4 to an LD player’s AC-3RF  
output, you need a commercially available demodula-  
tor.  
S VIDEO OUT  
Satellite, cable, set-top  
box, LD player, etc.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 33 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Using Analog Connections  
Using Composite Video  
If your video source doesn’t have digital audio outputs,  
or you want to record from it, you’ll need to make the  
following analog audio connections.  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO VIDEO 3 or 4 IN L/R inputs to the  
analog audio outputs on your video source, as shown.  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO 5 INPUT VIDEO input to the composite video  
output on your camcorder, games console, etc., as  
shown.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
R
L
Direct/  
Zone  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
2
Pure Audio  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
Selector  
Display  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDE
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
1
2
IN  
IN  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
SURR  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDE
VIDEO  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
Camcorder,  
games console, etc.  
R
L
Audio Connections  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s VIDEO 5 INPUT AUDIO L/R inputs to the  
analog audio outputs on your camcorder, games console,  
etc., as shown.  
TV, Satellite, cable, set-  
top box, LD player, etc.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Connecting a Camcorder, Games  
Console, etc.  
Direct/  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Pure Audio  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Video Connections  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Digital  
You only need to use one of the following connection  
methods.  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
L
Using S-Video  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s VIDEO  
5 INPUT S VIDEO input to the S-Video output on your  
camcorder, games console, etc., as shown.  
R
L
AUDIO  
R
Camcorder,  
games console, etc.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone 2  
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Pure Audio  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
If your camcorder, games console, etc., has an optical  
digital audio output, use an optical digital audio cable to  
connect it to the DTR-8.4’s VIDEO 5 INPUT DIGITAL  
input, as shown.  
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
S VIDEO  
S VIDEO OUT  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(GRN)  
Rec (RED)  
Pure Audio  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Camcorder,  
games console, etc.  
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
Camcorder,  
games console, etc.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 34 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Connecting a CD Player  
Connecting a Cassette Recorder  
Using Optical or Coaxial Connections  
• Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 1 to the optical output  
on your CD player, as shown.  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO TAPE IN L/R inputs to the cassette  
recorder’s outputs, and use another analog audio cable  
(RCA/phono) to connect the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO TAPE  
OUT L/R outputs to the cassette recorder’s inputs, as  
shown.  
OR  
• Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX 2, or 3 to the coaxial  
output on your CD player, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
1
2
3
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
DIGITAL  
IN  
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
L
R
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
1
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTP
MONITOR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
1
2
3
OU
2
3
4
OUT  
AUDIO  
R
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
CE
AM  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
IN  
SURR  
SURR  
CD  
PR  
IN  
TAPE  
SURR  
R
L
R
L
BACK/  
OUT  
OPT  
1
INPUT  
Y
1
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
2
3
IN  
OUT  
IN  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
IN  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
IN  
IN  
1
R
L
GND  
R
L
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
SUB  
CENTER  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
PLAY  
(OUT)  
REC  
(IN)  
L
L
Cassette recorder  
Connect one or the other  
/
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
R
R
Connecting a DAT, CD, or MD  
Recorder  
CD player  
Initially, the DIGITAL IN OPT 1 input is assigned to the  
CD input source. If you connect your CD player to a dif-  
ferent digital input, you’ll need to assign that input to the  
CD input source (see page 45).  
You can connect a DAT, CD, or MD recorder instead of  
a cassette recorder.  
Analog Connections  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’sAUDIO TAPE IN L/R inputs to the recorder’s  
outputs, and use another analog audio cable (RCA/  
phono) to connect the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO TAPE OUT L/  
R outputs to the recorder’s inputs, as shown.  
Using Analog Connections  
Even if your CD player is connected digitally (coaxial or  
optical), to use  
, or to record audio from your CD  
player, you’ll need to make analog audio connections as  
well.  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’sAUDIO CD IN L/R inputs to the analog audio  
outputs on your CD player, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
1
2
3
R
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
AUDIO  
L
R
L
AUDIO  
R
SUB  
CENTER  
R
L
PHONO  
OUT  
N  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
IN  
TAPE  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
SURR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
CD  
R
L
IN  
R
L
OUT  
CENTER  
OPT  
1
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
IN  
SURR  
BACK  
IN  
TAPE  
SURR  
R
2
IN  
SURR  
IN  
R
L
GND  
AUDIO  
BACK/  
OPT  
1
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
ZONE  
2
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
CD  
IN  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
PLAY  
(OUT)  
REC  
(IN)  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DAT, CD, or MD recorder  
CD player  
R
L
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 35 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Using Coaxial or Optical Connections  
(playback only)  
• Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX 2, or 3 to the coaxial  
output on your recorder, as shown.  
OR  
Note:  
Don’t connect the recorder’s digital output to the  
DTR-8.4 when the recorder’s digital input is connected  
to one of the DTR-8.4’s digital outputs. Doing so may  
create a signal loop and cause a malfunction.  
• Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 2 to the optical output  
on your recorder, as shown.  
Connecting a Turntable  
The DTR-8.4’s phono inputs are for use with moving  
magnet (MM) type cartridges.  
Use an analog audio cable (RCA/phono) to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO PHONO IN L/R inputs to the audio  
outputs on your turntable, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
COAX  
1
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OU
MONITOR  
2
3
4
1
2
3
OUT  
R
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
SURR  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
2
3
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
ANTENNA  
SURR  
BACK  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
TAPE  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
R
L
2
IN  
IN  
CENTER  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
SURR  
AUDIO  
PR  
SURR  
R
L
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INP
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
VIDE
VIDEO  
PHONO  
IN  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
Connect one or the other  
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
SURR  
BACK  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
DAT, CD, or MD  
recorder  
GND  
L
You might need to change the digital input-to-input  
source assignments (page 45).  
R
Digital Recording  
Notes:  
If your recorder has a digital input, by connecting it to  
one of the DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL OUTs you can record  
digitally. Since the DTR-8.4 does not convert analog  
input signals to digital and vice versa, only input signals  
connected to a DIGITAL IN can be recorded digitally.  
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the  
GND screw on the DTR-8.4. With some turntables,  
connecting the ground wire may cause hum, in which  
case it should be disconnected.  
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-  
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC  
phono preamp. Connect the phono preamp to your  
turntable, and then connect the phono preamp to the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO PHONO IN L/R inputs.  
Digital source  
(DAT, CD, MD  
player)  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
Connect one or the other  
DIGITAL  
IN  
IN  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
COAX  
R
L
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
1
2
3
R
L
OPT  
CENTER  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
SURR  
AUDIO  
SURR  
R
L
L
R
L
2
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
TUNER  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
L
2
3
4
AUDIO  
R
R
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
2
SURR  
OPT  
2
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
IN  
2
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
DAT, CD, or MD recorder  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL IN  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 36 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Connecting a Power Amp  
Connecting  
Components  
If you want to use the DTR-8.4 as a preamp and connect  
an external power amp, for example, a multichannel  
power amp that’s more powerful than the DTR-8.4’s  
built-in power amp, you can connect it to the PRE OUT  
outputs. In this case, you should connect all speakers and  
the subwoofer to the external power amp.  
With  
(Remote Interactive) you can control your  
-compatible Integra/Onkyo CD player, DVD player,  
and so on with the DTR-8.4’s remote controller, and use  
the following special  
functions:  
To use , you must make an RCA/phono analog  
audio connection between the DTR-8.4 and the  
other AV components, even if they are connected  
digitally.  
If you have a powered subwoofer, connect it to the  
DTR-8.4’s PRE OUT SUB output.  
Auto Power On/Standby  
When you start playback on anAV component connected  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
R
FRONT  
L
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
via  
, if the DTR-8.4 is in Standby, it will turn on and  
R
L
CENTER  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
SURR  
select that AV component as the input source automati-  
cally. Similarly, when the DTR-8.4 is set to Standby, all  
AUDIO  
SURR  
R
L
L
SUB  
CENTER  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
TUNER  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
L
2
3
4
AUDIO  
R
R
SUB  
CENTER  
SURR  
PHONO  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
components connected via  
also enter Standby. This  
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
SUR  
R
L
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
function will not work if a component’s power cord is  
connected to an AC OUTLET on the DTR-8.4.  
SURR  
BACK  
BACK/  
TAPE  
IN  
ZONE  
2
2
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on an AV component con-  
nected via  
, the DTR-8.4 automatically selects that  
AV component as the input source.  
FRONT  
Remote Operation function  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
With the DTR-8.4’s remote controller, you can operate  
-compatible Integra/Onkyo components.  
SURR  
R
L
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DTR-8.4  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
MODEL NO. DTR-8.4  
RATING: AC120V  
60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
CENTER  
SURR  
BACK  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
R
L
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
I
R
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12  
V
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Power amplifier  
R
L
IN  
IN  
R
L
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
e.g., DVD player  
e.g., MD recorder  
L
1. Subwoofer  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
6. Surround right speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
R
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
L
R
Notes:  
• Push plugs in all the way to make good connections.  
• Use only cables for connections. An  
cable is not included with the DTR-8.4.  
• Some AV components have two  
sockets, you can  
connect either one to the DTR-8.4. The other is for  
connecting additional  
-compatible components.  
• Connect the DTR-8.4’s  
socket to only Integra/  
Onkyo AV components. Connecting to other manufac-  
turer’sAV components may cause them to malfunction.  
• Some components may not support all  
functions.  
Refer to the manuals supplied with your components.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 37 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other  
Components  
Connecting the Power Cord  
Notes:  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all of your  
speakers and AV components.  
The DTR-8.4 has AC outlet(s) on its rear panel that can  
be used to connect the power cords of AV components  
that you intend to use with the DTR-8.4. These compo-  
nents can then be left turned on so that they turn on and  
off as and when the DTR-8.4 is turned on and set to  
Standby.  
• Turning on the DTR-8.4 may cause a momentary  
power surge that might interfere with other electrical  
equipment on the same circuit. If this is a problem,  
plug the DTR-8.4 into a different branch circuit.  
• Do not use a power cord other than the one supplied  
with the DTR-8.4. The supplied power cord is  
designed exclusively for use with the DTR-8.4 and  
should not be used with any other equipment.  
• Never disconnect the power cord from the DTR-8.4  
while the other end is still plugged into a wall outlet.  
Doing so may cause an electric shock. Always discon-  
nect the power cord from the wall outlet first, and then  
the DTR-8.4.  
AC OUTLETS  
Connect the supplied power cord  
to the DTR-8.4’s AC INLET.  
1
Plug the power cord into an AC  
wall outlet.  
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
2
The Standby indicator lights up.  
Caution:  
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components  
that you connect to theAC OUTLETS does not exceed  
the stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).  
Note:  
• Integra/Onkyo components with  
be connected to regular wall outlets.  
sockets should  
AC INLET  
• The number of AC OUTLETS, connector type, and  
total capacity will depend on the country in which you  
purchased the DTR-8.4.  
Power cord  
(supplied)  
To wall  
outlet  
Connecting the RS232 Port  
This port can be used to connect an external controller  
for controlling the DTR-8.4.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 38 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Connecting the DTR-8.4—Continued  
Turning On the DTR-8.4  
1
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Pure Audio  
(
)
Zone  
2
GRN  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
Selector  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Display  
Pure Audio  
Upsampling  
1
2
Push To Open  
DTR-8.4  
Standby/On  
Press the [Standby/On] button to turn on the DTR-8.4.  
The display lights up and the Standby indicator goes off.  
1
Press the Standby/On button again to enter Standby.  
Note:  
Turning on the DTR-8.4 may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment on  
the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the DTR-8.4 into a different branch circuit.  
Turning On the DTR-8.4 with the Remote Controller  
2
1
The DTR-8.4 must be in Standby mode for the following procedure to work.  
Press the scroll wheel.  
“AMP” appears on the remote controller’s display. This is the mode for controlling the  
DTR-8.4.  
1
Press the [On] button to turn on the DTR-8.4.  
To set the DTR-8.4 to Standby, press the [Standby] button.  
2
Note:  
• Any components connected via  
will also be turned on when the remote controller’s [On] button is pressed again.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 39 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup  
This chapter explains the settings that you should make before using the DTR-8.4.  
About the Onscreen Setup Menus  
The onscreen setup menus (OSD) are used to configure the DTR-8.4. They appear on the TV connected to the DTR-8.4,  
and their large size makes them easy to use.  
Settings are divided into two groups: basic and advanced.  
Since the advanced menus contain all of the available settings, in this manual, the advanced menus are used in the  
explanations. All of the Basic menus are included in the Advanced menus.  
To get to the Advanced Menu from the Basic  
Basic Setup  
Pages  
Advanced Setup  
Pages  
Menu, use the Down [ ] button to select  
“Advanced Menu,” and then press the [Enter]  
button. To get to the Basic Menu from the  
Advanced Menu, use the Down  
Submenus  
0.Hardware Setup  
p.40  
p.86  
p.48  
1.Speaker Impedance  
2.Surr Back/Zone2  
3.Remote Setup  
4.TV Format  
[
] button to select “Basic  
1
*
Menu,” and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
p.49  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
1.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Config  
p.41  
p.43  
p.44  
2.Speaker Distance  
3.Level Calibration  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
p.45  
p.46  
1.Digital Setup  
p.63  
p.73  
p.74  
p.67  
p.68  
2.Multichannel Setup  
3.Video Setup  
4.Character Input  
5.IntelliVolume  
6.Listening Mode Preset  
7.12V Trigger  
Main menus  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
Basic Menu  
3.Audio Adjust  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
1.Tone Control  
2.Surround Speakers  
3.Sound Effect  
4.Delay  
5.LFE Level  
6.Mono  
7.Theater-Dimensional  
8.Surround  
p.72  
p.68  
3.Audio Adjust  
Advanced Menu  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
3.Audio Adjust  
Advanced Menu  
9.THX  
0.Hardware Setup  
1.Speaker Setup  
2.Input Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Preference  
10.Mono Movie  
11.Enhance  
12.Orchestra  
13.Unplugged  
14.Studio-Mix  
15.TV Logic  
5.Network Setup  
Basic Menu  
default  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
4.Preference  
1.Volume Setup  
p.72  
p.72  
p.73  
p.73  
2.Headphones Level  
3.OSD Setup  
4.OSD Position  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
5.Network Setup  
p.83  
p.83  
1.IP Address  
2.Proxy Setup  
3.MAC Address  
4.Client Setup  
Save Settings  
1
*
Australian model only  
|ENTER|Quit:|SETUP|  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 40 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Speaker Settings  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “0. Hardware  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
2
3
Speaker Impedance  
This section explains how to specify the impedance of  
your speakers. Check the backs of your speakers or their  
manuals to determine their impedance.  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Note:  
Before you change this setting, turn down the volume.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “1. Speaker Imped-  
ance,and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
The Speaker Impedance menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
0.Hardware Setup  
0-1.Speaker Impedance  
1
a.Minimum  
:6 ohms  
2, 3  
2–4  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
4
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any  
one speaker is between 4 and  
6 ohms.  
1, 5  
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all  
speakers are between 6 and  
16 ohms.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
Notes:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
1
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 41 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Speaker Configuration  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “1. Speaker Con-  
fig,and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
3
This section explains how to specify which speakers are  
connected and their sizes.  
For speakers with a cone diameter  
over 6-1/2 inches (16 cm), specify  
large, and for those with a diameter  
below this, specify small.  
The Speaker Config menu appear.  
Advanced Menu  
1.Speaker Setup  
If you’re using THX-certified speak-  
ers, specify Small for all speakers.  
Cone diameter  
1-1.Speaker Config  
a.Subwoofer  
b.Front  
:Yes  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
:Small  
c.Center  
d.Surround  
e.Surr Back  
f.Crossover:80Hz(THX)  
Quit:|SETUP|  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Subwoofer,”  
and then use the Left/Right [ ]/  
4
5
[
] buttons to select:  
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
1
2, 3  
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
2–9  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to selectb. Front,and then  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
1, 10  
Small: Select if the front speakers are  
small.  
Large: Select if the front speakers are  
large.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
1
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Note:  
• If the Subwoofer setting in step 4 is  
set to No, this setting is fixed at  
Large.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “c. Center,and  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
6
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
]
tons to select1. Speaker Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Small: Select if the center speaker is  
small.  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Large: Select if the center speaker is  
large.  
None: Select if no center speaker is  
connected.  
Note:  
• If the Front setting in step 5 is set to  
Small, the Large option cannot be  
selected.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 42 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Crossover Frequency  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “d. Surround,and  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
Small: Select if the surround left and  
right speakers are small.  
Large: Select if the surround left and  
right speakers are large.  
None: Select if no surround left and  
right speakers are connected.  
7
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “f. Crossover,and  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
9
]
]
buttons to select a crossover fre-  
quency.  
Choose a crossover frequency suitable  
for your setup. If you’re using a sub-  
woofer, choose a crossover frequency  
based on the diameter of your front  
speakers. If you’re not using a sub-  
woofer, use the diameter of any speaker  
that you specified as Small.  
Note:  
• If the Front setting in step 5 is set to  
Small, the Large option cannot be  
selected.  
If you’re using THX-certified speakers,  
select 80 (THX).  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “e. Surr Back,and  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
Small: Select if the surround back  
left and right speakers are  
small.  
8
Speaker cone  
diameter  
Crossover  
frequency  
]
Over 12 in.  
(30 cm)  
40Hz  
60Hz  
8 to 12 in.  
(20–30 cm)  
Large: Select if the surround back  
left and right speakers are  
large.  
None: Select if no surround back left  
and right speakers are con-  
nected.  
6-1/2 to 8 in.  
(16–20 cm)  
80Hz (THX)  
100Hz  
5-1/4 to 6-1/2 in.  
(13–16 cm)  
3-1/2 to 5-1/4 in.  
(9–13 cm)  
120Hz  
Notes:  
Under 3-1/2 in.  
(9 cm)  
150Hz  
• If the Surround setting in step 7 is set  
to None, this setting cannot be  
selected.  
• If the Surround setting in step 7 is set  
to Small, this setting cannot be set to  
Large.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
10  
• If the Surr Back/Zone2 setting is set  
to Zone 2, this setting cannot be  
selected (see page 86).  
Notes:  
Continue with step 9 in the right col-  
umn.  
• If the crossover frequency is set to a low value, and the  
program material doesn’t contain any sounds that are  
below that frequency, accordingly, the subwoofer will  
not output much sound.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 43 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Speaker Distance  
The Speaker Distance menu appears.  
This section explains how to specify the distance  
between the listening position and each individual  
speaker so that the sound from each speaker arrives at the  
listener’s ears at the same time.  
Advanced Menu  
1.Speaker Setup  
1-2.Speaker Distance  
a.Unit  
:meters  
: 3.60m  
: 3.60m  
: 2.10m  
b.Left  
c.Center  
d.Right  
e.Surr Right : 2.10m  
f.Surr Back R : 2.10m  
g.Surr Back L : 2.10m  
h.Surr Left  
i.Subwoofer  
: 2.10m  
: 3.60m  
1
Quit:|SETUP|  
2, 3  
Note:  
2–5  
Speakers that you set to No or None on  
the Speaker Configuration page  
(page 41) cannot be selected on this  
page.  
1, 7  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Unit,and then  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
4
5
feet: Select if you want to enter  
distances in feet. Can be set  
from 1 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot  
steps.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
1
The main menu appears onscreen.  
meters: Select if you want to enter  
distances in meters. Can be  
set from 0.3 to 9 meters in  
0.15-meter steps.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “b. Left,and then  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to specify the distance.  
Specify the distance from the front left  
speaker to your listening position.  
2
tons to select1. Speaker Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Repeat step 5 for all of your  
speakers.  
6
7
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Speaker Dis-  
tance,and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
Notes:  
• If the distance between the furthest and nearest speak-  
ers is greater than 20 feet (6 meters), corrected values  
suitable for home theater use will be set automatically.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 44 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Speaker Level Calibration  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “3. Level Calibra-  
tion,and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
The Level Calibration menu appears  
and the pink noise test tone is output by  
the front left speaker.  
3
This section explains how to adjust the level of each  
speaker individually using the built-in test tone so that  
the volume of each speaker is the same at the listening  
position.  
Notes:  
• The speakers cannot be calibrated while the output of  
the DTR-8.4 is muted, while a pair of headphones is  
connected, or when using the multichannel inputs.  
• Since the DTR-8.4 supports THX, the test tone is  
output at the standard level of 0 dB (absolute vol-  
ume setting 82). If you normally listen at volume  
settings below this, be careful because the test tone  
will be much louder.  
Advanced Menu  
1.Speaker Setup  
1-3.Level Calibration  
a.Left  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
b.Center  
c.Right  
d.Surr Right  
e.Surr Back R : 0dB  
f.Surr Back L : 0dB  
g.Surr Left  
h.Subwoofer  
: 0dB  
: 0dB  
Quit:|SETUP|  
Note:  
Speakers that you set to No or None on  
the Speaker Configuration page  
(page 41) cannot be selected on this  
page.  
1
2, 3  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to adjust the speaker vol-  
ume, and use the Up/Down [ ]/  
4
2–4  
1, 6  
[
] buttons to select the other  
speakers.  
The volume can be adjusted from –12  
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Repeat step 4 until the volume of  
the test tone coming from each  
speaker is the same.  
5
6
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select1. Speaker Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Notes:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
remote controller’s [Test Tone] button. First press the  
[Test Tone] button to output the test tone. Use the  
[Level–] and [Level+] buttons to adjust the speaker  
volume, and use the [CH SEL] button to select the  
other speakers.  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
• To calibrate the speaker more accurately, use a com-  
mercially available sound pressure level (SPL) meter.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 45 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Input Setup  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
2
3
Digital Setup  
This section explains how to assign digital inputs to  
input sources. You only need to change these assign-  
ments if you connect a component to a digital input other  
than the default assignment listed in the following table.  
For example, if you connect a DVD player to the DIGI-  
TAL IN OPT 2 input, since the default DVD assignment  
is COAX1, you would need to assign OPT2 to DVD.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Input source  
DVD  
Default digital input  
COAX1 (coaxial 1)  
COAX2 (coaxial 2)  
COAX3 (coaxial 3)  
OPT3 (optical 3)  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
TAPE  
OPT4 (optical 4)  
OPT2 (optical 2)  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “1. Digital Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
PHONO  
CD  
---- (No assignment)  
OPT1 (optical 1)  
4
Note:  
The Digital Setup menu appears.  
If you connect a cassette recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT  
sockets, you should change the TAPE assignment to  
“----.”  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
2-1.Digital Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.Digital Input  
:COAX1  
b.Digital Format  
:All  
1, 2  
1
3, 4  
Quit:|SETUP|  
3–5  
The name of the currently selected  
input source appears next to “Input,”  
“DVD” in this case.  
2, 6  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Digital Input,”  
and then use the Left/Right [ ]/  
5
[
] buttons to select a digital  
input.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
1
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to assign.  
Note:  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
6
There are no assignments for the  
TUNER, VIDEO 5, and NET AUDIO  
input sources.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
input selector buttons, [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/  
[
] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 46 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Video Setup  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
3
4
This section explains how to assign the composite video/  
S-Video inputs to input sources.You only need to change  
these settings if you connect a video component to a  
video input other than the default assignment listed in the  
following table, or if you want to enjoy audio and video  
from different sources. There are no other reasons to  
change these assignments.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Analog audio  
input (fixed)  
Composite/  
S-Video inputs  
Input source  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
TAPE  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
TAPE  
DVD  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “3. Video Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
VIDEO1  
VIDEO2  
VIDEO3  
VIDEO4  
VIDEO5  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
The Video Setup menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
CD  
2-3.Video Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.Video  
:DVD  
b.Component Video  
:INPUT1  
NET AUDIO  
NET AUDIO  
If, for example, you want to watch the video component  
connected to the DVD S VIDEO input while listening to  
the CD input source, change the CD input source assign-  
ment from Last Valid to DVD.  
Quit:|SETUP|  
The name of the currently selected  
input source appears next to “Input,”  
“DVD” in this case.  
As another example, say you connect the audio output of  
a satellite receiver to the CD input, and its video output  
to the VIDEO 4 S VIDEO input, since the default video  
assignment for CD is Last Valid, you’ll need to change it  
to VIDEO 4.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Video,and  
5
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select a video input.  
Select “----” if you don’t want any  
video to be output while an input source  
is selected.  
]
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to assign.  
1
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
6
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
Note:  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• If you select Last Valid, the video source remains the  
same when you select another input source. For exam-  
ple, if you set the VIDEO 1 input source to Last Valid,  
then select the DVD input source, then select the  
VIDEO 1 input source, you can watch a DVD while  
listening to the audio from the component connected  
to the VIDEO 1 audio inputs.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
input selector buttons, [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/  
[
] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 47 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Component Video Setup  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “3. Video Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
4
This section explains how to assign the component video  
inputs to input sources.You only need to change this set-  
ting if you connect a video component to a component  
video input other than the default assignment listed in the  
following table, or if you want to output composite video  
or S-Video sources from the component video output.  
There are no other reasons to change these assignments.  
The Video Setup menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
Analog audio  
input (fixed)  
Component  
video inputs  
2-3.Video Setup  
Input:DVD  
Input source  
a.Video  
:DVD  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
TAPE  
DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
TAPE  
INPUT1  
INPUT2  
b.Component Video  
:INPUT1  
INPUT2  
Quit:|SETUP|  
INPUT2  
INPUT2  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “b. Component  
Video,and then use the Left/  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
INPUT1: Select if the video compo-  
nent is connected to COM-  
PONENT VIDEO INPUT  
1.  
5
INPUT2  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
TUNER  
PHONO  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
CD  
NET AUDIO  
NET AUDIO  
INPUT2: Select if the video compo-  
nent is connected to COM-  
PONENT VIDEO INPUT  
2.  
VIDEO: Select this to output com-  
posite and S-Video  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to assign.  
1
sources from the COM-  
PONENT VIDEO OUT-  
PUT.  
Last Valid: Select this for audio-only  
components.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
2
3
None: Select this if you want no  
video to be output when  
the input source is  
selected.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
6
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Notes:  
• If you select Last Valid, the video source remains the  
same when you select another input source. For exam-  
ple, if you set the VIDEO 1 input source to Last Valid,  
then select the DVD input source, then select the  
VIDEO 1 input source, you can watch a DVD while  
listening to the audio from the component connected  
to the VIDEO 1 audio inputs.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
input selector buttons, [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/  
[
] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 48 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Changing the DTR-8.4’s Remote Control ID  
Remote Setup  
This section explains how to change the DTR-8.4’s  
remote control ID. You may need to change this if the  
DTR-8.4’s remote controller interferes with other Inte-  
gra/Onkyo components located in the same room.  
Specifying the Location of an IR Receiver  
This section explains how to specify the location when  
using a commercially available IR receiver.  
Note:  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
If you change the DTR-8.4’s remote control ID, be sure  
to select the same ID on the remote controller (page 49).  
The default ID for both the DTR-8.4 and remote control-  
ler is 1.  
1
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
1
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “0. Hardware  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “0. Hardware  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “3. Remote Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] button.  
The Remote Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
0-3.Remote Setup  
tons to select “3. Remote Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
a.Position  
:Main  
:1  
b.Remote ID  
The Remote Setup menu appears.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Position,and  
4
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
]
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to selectb. Remote ID,and  
4
Main: Select if the IR receiver is  
located in the main room.  
Zone 2: Select if the IR receiver is  
located in, and will be used to  
control Zone 2.  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select an ID: 1  
(default), 2, or 3.  
]
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
5
Note:  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 49 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Changing the Remote Controller’s Control ID  
Specifying the TV System  
(Australian model only)  
This section explains how to change the remote control-  
ler’s ID. You may need to change this if the DTR-8.4’s  
remote controller interferes with other Integra/Onkyo  
components located in the same room.  
This section explains how to specify the TV system used  
in your area. (This setting is not available on the Ameri-  
can model.)  
Note:  
If you change the remote controller’s ID, be sure to select  
the same ID on the DTR-8.4 (page 48). The default ID  
for both the DTR-8.4 and remote controller is 1.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Hold down the remote control-  
1
ler’s [Custom] button for more  
than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “0. Hardware  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“SETUP” menu, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
2
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select ID  
menu, and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select4.TV Format,and  
then press the [Enter] button.  
The TV Format menu appears.  
0-4.TV Format  
Roll the scroll wheel to select an  
4
a.TV Format  
:Auto  
ID—1 (default), 2, or 3—and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
Select the same ID as that set on the  
DTR-8.4.  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
4
Auto: The DTR-8.4 automatically  
detects the TV system.  
PAL: Select if the TV system in  
your area is PAL.  
NTSC: Select if the TV system in  
your area is NTSC.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 50 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Setup—Continued  
Changing the Input Source Display  
for Use with a MiniDisc Recorder  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
If you connect an  
Disc recorder to the DTR-8.4’s TAPE IN/OUT sockets,  
so that functions such as Auto Power On/Off work  
-compatible Integra/Onkyo Mini-  
properly, you must change the input source display.  
Note:  
This setting can only be changed on the DTR-8.4.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
Selector  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Push  
To  
Open  
DTR-8.4  
1, 2  
Press the [Tape] input selector  
button so that “TAPE” appears  
on the display.  
1
2
Tape  
Press and hold down the [Tape]  
input selector button until “MD”  
appears on the display (about 3  
seconds).  
Tape  
Note:  
• To return to the original setting, while “MD” is being  
displayed, press and hold down the [Tape] input selec-  
tor button until “TAPE” appears on the display (about  
3 seconds).  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 51 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation  
Selecting the Source AV Component  
This section explains how to select the AV component that you want to listen to or watch.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
Selector  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Push  
To  
Open  
1
3
DTR-8.4  
1
3
Use the input selector buttons to select the AV component.  
1
DTR-8.4  
DVD  
Video 1  
Video 2  
Video 5  
Phono  
On the remote controller, roll the scroll wheel to select the input  
source and remote controller mode.  
Remote  
controller  
Video 3  
Tape  
CD  
Video 4  
Tuner  
Note:  
or  
If neither the [Input] nor [Mode] button is illuminated, the input source and  
remote controller mode are selected simultaneously. If either button is illumi-  
nated, press that button first.  
Net Audio  
Start playback on the selected AV component.  
2
When you select DVD or another video source component, on your TV you’ll  
need to select the video input to which the DTR-8.4 is connected.  
On some DVD players, you might need to turn on the digital output.  
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control, or the  
remote controller’s [VOL] button.  
The volume can be set from 0 to 100.  
3
Remote  
controller  
DTR-8.4  
Master Volume  
The DTR-8.4 is designed for home theater enjoyment. It has a wide volume  
range, allowing precise adjustment.  
or  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 52 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Note:  
• Any component in Zone 2 connected to the DTR-8.4’s  
12V TRIGGER OUT will also turn off when the spec-  
ified sleep time expires.  
Scroll wheel  
Setting the Display Brightness  
Dimmer  
Sleep  
You can adjust the brightness of the DTR-8.4’s display  
as follows.  
Muting  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Dimmer] button to  
select: dim, dimmer, or normal  
brightness.  
Muting the DTR-8.4 (remote controller  
only)  
With this function you can temporarily mute the output  
of the DTR-8.4.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the remote controller’s  
[Muting] button.  
The output is muted and the MUTING  
indicator flashes on the display.  
To unmute the DTR-8.4, press the  
remote controller’s [Muting] but-  
ton again.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Dimmer] button.  
Using Headphones  
You can connect a pair of stereo headphones (1/4-inch  
phone plug) to the DTR-8.4’s PHONES jack for private  
listening.  
Note:  
Standby/On  
• The Mute function is cancelled when the volume is  
adjusted or the DTR-8.4 is set to Standby.  
Standby  
Direct/  
Pure Audio  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Phones  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Selector  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
Using the Sleep Timer  
(remote controller only)  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
TH
With the sleep timer you can set the DTR-8.4 so that it  
automatically turns off after a specified period.  
Notes:  
• Turn down the volume before connecting your head-  
phones.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Sleep] button repeat-  
edly to select the required sleep  
time.  
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10  
minutes in 10 minute steps.  
The SLEEP indicator appears on the  
display when the sleep timer has been  
set. The specified sleep time appears on  
the display, then the previous display  
reappears.  
To check the remaining sleep time,  
press the [Sleep] button. Note that if  
you press the [Sleep] button while the  
sleep time is being displayed, you’ll  
shorten the sleep time by 10 minutes.  
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the  
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers.  
(Any speakers in Zone 2 continue working.)  
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Mono,  
Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio. When you disconnect  
the headphones, the previous listening mode is  
resumed.  
• Only the Stereo, Direct, Pure Audio, and Mono listen-  
ing modes can be used with headphones. (Available  
listening modes also depends on the currently selected  
input source.)  
• When you use the multichannel inputs, only the front  
left and right channels can be heard in the headphones.  
To cancel the sleep timer, press the  
[Sleep] button repeatedly until the  
SLEEP indicator disappears.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 53 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Setting the Input Signal Format  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
3
4
With this function you can set the signal format (analog,  
digital, or multichannel) that you want to use with AV  
components that are connected to a digital input, analog  
input, and the multichannel input. This can be set indi-  
vidually for each input source.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
1
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “1. Digital Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
The Digital Setup menu appears.  
2
press the [Audio SEL] button  
repeatedly to select “Auto,Mul-  
tich,or “Analog.”  
2-1.Digital Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.Digital Input  
:COAX1  
Auto: The assigned digital input  
has priority over the analog  
input. If no digital signal is  
present, the analog input is  
used.  
b.Digital Format  
:All  
Quit:[SETUP]  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to selectb. Digital Format,”  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select a format, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
All: PCM, Dolby Digital, and  
DTS formats are accepted. If  
no digital signal is present,  
the analog input is used.  
Multich: The multichannel input is  
used.  
Analog: The analog input is used  
even if the input source is  
connected digitally.  
5
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons and [Audio Selector]  
button.  
DTS: Select this option if playing a  
DTS CD with the All option  
produces noise while the  
Fixing the Digital Input Format  
DTR-8.4 is identifying the  
With this function you can set the digital inputs to accept  
only DTS, PCM, or both formats. This can be set indi-  
vidually for each input source.  
DTS format or when using  
fast forward or fast reverse. If  
the input signal is anything  
other than DTS, nothing is  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
1
output.  
PCM: Select this option if playing a  
CD or other PCM source with  
the All option causes the tops  
of tracks to be clipped. If the  
input signal is anything other  
than PCM, nothing is output.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
Notes:  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• Select All or DTS when playing a CD or LD with  
DTS. If you select PCM, only noise will be heard.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons, [Setup] button,  
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 54 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Listening to Stereo FM Radio Stations  
When the DTR-8.4 is properly tuned to a radio station,  
Using the Tuner  
With the built-in tuner you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations.You can store your favorite radio stations as pre-  
sets for quick selection.  
the “ TUNED  
” indicators appear on the display.  
When the DTR-8.4 is properly tuned to a stereo FM  
radio station, the “FM STEREO” indicator appears as  
well.  
Tuning into Radio Stations  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be  
impossible to achieve good reception. If this happens,  
press the DTR-8.4’s [FM Mode] button to listen to the  
station in mono (the “AUTO” and “FM STEREO” indi-  
cators go off).  
1
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Specifying Radio Stations by Frequency  
To select a radio station by entering its frequency, press  
the remote controller’s [Direct Tuning] button, and then  
use the number buttons to enter the frequency.  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
2
Presetting Radio Stations  
You can store up to 40 AM and FM radio stations as pre-  
sets.  
Use the [Tuner] input selector  
button to select either AM or FM.  
1
2
Tuner  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
Use the DTR-8.4’s Tuning Up/  
Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to tune  
into a station.  
1
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Tuning  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
The following illustration shows the  
tuner-related indicators on the display.  
2, 4 3  
TUNED indicator  
AUTO indicator  
Tune into a radio station as  
explained previously.  
1
2
Press the DTR-8.4’s [Memory]  
button.  
Band  
Frequency  
FM STEREO  
indicator  
Memory  
The preset number flashes.  
To locate an FM station automatically,  
press and hold the Tuning Up or Down  
ch  
[
]/[ ] button for more than 1/2 a  
second. The DTR-8.4 scans the FM  
band up or down, depending on which  
button you pressed, stopping when a  
stereo FM station is found.  
Use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select a preset from 1 to 40.  
3
4
Preset  
Notes:  
• The tuner frequency changes in 0.1 MHz steps for FM  
and 10 kHz steps for AM (0.05 MHz and 9 kHz  
respectively on some models).  
Press the [Memory] button to  
store the preset.  
Memory  
The preset number stops flashing.  
You can name your presets for easy  
identification (see page 73).  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 55 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Selecting Presets  
Deleting Presets  
This section explains how to delete presets.  
You can select previously stored presets as follows.  
1
1
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Direct/  
Pure Audio  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Rec (RED)  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
1
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
3
2
2
Press the [Tuner] input selector  
button.  
Press the [Tuner] input selector  
button.  
Tuner  
1
2
1
2
Tuner  
On the remote controller, press  
the [Input] button, and then use  
the scroll wheel to select TUNER  
(press the scroll wheel to select  
FM or AM).  
Use the Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select the preset that you want  
to delete.  
Preset  
Use the Preset [ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select the presets.  
Preset  
While holding down the [Mem-  
ory] button, press the [FM Mode]  
button.  
On the remote controller, use the  
[CH/Disc] button to select the  
presets.  
3
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
The selected preset is deleted.  
Selecting Presets by Number  
To select a preset by number, use the remote controller’s  
number buttons. For example, to select preset #7, press  
[7]. To select preset #12, press [1] then [2].  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 56 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music  
Use this mode to add 5.1 surround to stereo sources such  
as music CDs and DVDs.  
Listening Modes  
About the Listening Modes  
Dolby Digital  
With its built-in surround-sound decoders and DSP pro-  
grams, the DTR-8.4 can transform your home listening  
room into a movie theater or concert hall.  
With this format you can experience the  
same superb sound that you get at a movie  
theater or concert hall. Use this mode with DVDs that  
bear the Dolby Digital logo.  
To get the most from surround sound, it’s important that  
you install and configure your speakers correctly. See  
“Connecting Your Speakers” on page 23 and “Speaker  
Settings” on page 40 for information.  
Dolby Digital EX  
With an added surround-back channel,  
this 6.1 channel format offers a heightened  
sense of space, for added realism with moving sounds,  
such as those that rotate 360 degrees or pass overhead.  
Dolby Digital EX material can also be played on conven-  
tional 5.1 channel systems, in which case the surround-  
back channel audio is divided between the surround left  
and right channels. Use this mode with DVDs that have  
a 5.1-channel soundtrack and bear the Dolby Digital  
logo.  
The DTR-8.4’s surround indicators show which speak-  
ers are active in each listening mode.  
Front left  
Center  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
Surround Surround Surround  
left  
back left  
right  
right  
DTS  
Direct  
This digital surround format offers a sur-  
round sound experience with exceptional  
fidelity. It uses compressed digital audio  
data, with six completely separate channels  
(5.1), and the ability to handle large amounts of audio  
data while remaining faithful to the original. DTS pro-  
vides very high-quality sound. You’ll need a DTS com-  
patible DVD player in order to enjoy DTS material. Use  
this mode with DVDs, LDs, or CDs that bear the DTS  
logo.  
The selected input source is output by the front left and  
right speakers only, with minimal processing for a pure  
sound.  
Pure Audio  
As an extension of Direct mode, this mode turns off the  
display, turns off the power to the video circuitry, and  
minimizes any other possible noise sources, providing a  
high fidelity sound that’s true to the original. (Since the  
power to the video circuitry is turned off, no video sig-  
nals will be output.)  
DTS-ES Discrete  
Stereo  
This is DTS with an added surround back  
channel for 6.1 surround sound. Use it with  
program material recorded in DTS 6.1 format. With the  
additional surround back channel, this format offers 6.1  
fully independent digital channels, providing a realistic  
sense of movement and space. Use it with program mate-  
rial recorded in DTS 6.1, such as CDs, DVDs, or LDs  
that bear the DTS-ES logo.  
The selected input source is processed as a stereo signal  
and output by the front left and right speakers and the  
subwoofer.  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono  
soundtrack or to select multilingual soundtracks  
recorded in the left and right channel of some movies. It  
can also be used when playing a DVD or other source  
with multiplexed audio, such as a karaoke DVD.  
DTS-ES Matrix  
This is DTS with an added surround back  
channel for 6.1 surround sound. Use it to  
provide 6.1 channel surround playback  
with program material recorded in DTS 5.1  
format. Since DTS 5.1 program material  
contains surround back channel informa-  
tion, all channels can be reconstructed for 6.1 surround  
playback. Use this mode with CDs, DVDs, or LDs that  
bear the DTS-ES or DTS logo.  
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)  
or  
With this mode you can enjoy a virtual 5.1 surround  
sound even with only two or three speakers. This works  
by controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and  
right ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode  
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie  
Use this mode with DVDs and vid-  
eos that bear the Dolby Surround  
logo or TV programs that feature Dolby Surround. You  
can also use this mode with stereo movies or TV pro-  
grams and the DTR-8.4 will create a 5.1 surround mix  
from the 2-channel stereo.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 57 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
DSP Modes  
DTS Neo:6  
This mode provides 6.1 channel playback from 2-chan-  
nel sources. It offers six full-bandwidth channels with  
excellent separation. There are two modes of operation:  
Cinema mode, which is suited to movies, and Music  
mode, which is for listening to music.  
Orchestra  
or  
Suitable for classical or operatic music. The center  
speaker is turned off and the surround channels are  
emphasized in order to widen the stereo image. In addi-  
tion, it simulates the natural reverberation of a large hall.  
Cinema mode simulates the realistic sense of movement  
that you get with 6.1-channel surround sound sources.  
Use this mode with videos, DVDs, and TV programs that  
feature stereo sound.  
Unplugged  
Suitable for acoustic instrument sounds, vocals, and jazz  
music. By emphasizing the front stereo image, it simu-  
lates the stage-front experience.  
Music mode uses the surround channels to simulate a  
natural sound field that cannot be produced with conven-  
tional stereo. Use this mode with stereo source material  
such as music CDs.  
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock and pop music. Listening to music in  
this mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful  
acoustic image, like being at a club or rock concert.  
THX Cinema  
or  
THX Ltd, founded by George Lucas, develops quality  
assurance programs for ensuring that movies are repro-  
duced in movie theaters and home theaters just as the  
director intended. THX technology is used to eliminate  
spatial errors that can occur when a movie soundtrack is  
adapted for use in smaller home theaters, ensuring faith-  
ful reproduction.  
TV Logic  
Adds realistic acoustics to TV programs produced in a  
TV studio. In addition, it adds surround effects to the  
entire sound and adds clarity to voices.  
Enhance  
This mode is ideal for enjoying music programs or TV  
sports programs. It provides a natural surround sound  
with movement in the surround back speakers, creating  
a sound with a live feeling to it.  
This mode is ideal for watching a movie with a  
soundtrack recorded and edited especially for playback  
in the spaciousness of a typical movie theater.  
Mono Movie  
THX Surround EX  
This mode is suitable for use with old movies and other  
mono sound sources. The center speaker outputs the  
sound as it is, while reverb is applied to the sound output  
by the other speakers, giving presence to even mono  
material.  
This format was jointly developed by Dolby Laborato-  
ries and THX Ltd. especially for home theater use. It’s  
based on Dolby Digital EX technology. It adds an extra  
surround channel to the existing front left, front right,  
center, surround left, surround right, and LFE (sub-  
woofer) channels, making a total of 7.1 channels. (For  
best results with DVDs that feature THX Surround EX,  
use a THX-certified THX speaker system.)  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music. The front, surround, and  
surround back channels create a stereo image that fills  
the entire listening area.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 58 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
The following table shows which listening modes can be used with which input signal formats.  
DTS1  
Dolby Digital  
Input signal format  
Analog, PCM  
96 kHz PCM  
x/2.x  
2/0  
1/0  
(mono)  
6.1ch  
Other  
5.1ch  
(e.g., 5.1) (stereo)  
CD,TV, LD,VHS,  
MD, vinyl, radio, 96 kHz/24 bit  
Source  
DVD, LD, CD, etc.  
DVD, digital cable/satellite, etc.  
cassette, cable,  
satellite, etc.  
DVD, etc.  
Listening mode  
Direct  
Pure Audio  
Stereo  
Mono  
Theater-Dimensional  
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music  
Dolby Digital  
Dolby Digital EX  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete  
DTS-ES Matrix/DTS+Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema  
DTS Neo:6 Music  
THX Cinema  
THX Surround EX  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
Enhance  
Mono Movie  
All Ch Stereo  
1. When playing DTS 96 kHz/24-bit program material, if the listening mode is Stereo or DTS, it’s processed at 96 kHz. If any other  
listening mode is selected, it’s processed at 48 kHz.  
Notes:  
• Depending on the number of speakers that you connect, and the format of the input signal, you may not be able to  
select all of the above listening modes.  
• If you don’t connect any surround back speakers, or you connect speakers in Zone 2, some listening modes will not  
be available.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 59 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Notes:  
Selecting Listening Modes  
You cannot select any listening modes while the Mul-  
tich input source is selected.  
This section explains how to select the listening modes.  
• Depending on the number of speakers that you con-  
nect, and the format of the input signal, you may not  
be able to select all of the listening modes.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
[Pure A] button (remote controller)  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
[Direct] button (remote controller)  
This button selects the Direct listening mode.  
3 1 3  
[Direct/Pure Audio] button (DTR-8.4)  
This button selects the Direct and Pure Audio listening  
modes. The PURE AUDIO indicator lights up while the  
Pure Audio listening mode is selected.  
1
3
[Stereo] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
[Surround] button  
This button selects the following listening modes for use  
with 2-channel analog input sources: Dolby Pro Logic II  
Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema,  
and DTS Neo:6 Music.  
Use the input selector buttons to  
select the AV component.  
1
DTR-8.4  
DVD  
Video 1  
Video 2  
Video 5  
Phono  
On the remote controller, roll the  
scroll wheel to select the input  
source and remote controller  
mode.  
Video 3  
Tape  
CD  
Video 4  
Tuner  
If the current input source is digital, you can select Dolby  
Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS, DTS-ES, or DTS Neo:6  
with this button. (see “Using the Digital Surround  
Modes” on page 60).  
Net Audio  
Note:  
When a multichannel input source is selected, “Tone  
On” appears on the display, and you can adjust the bass  
and treble (see page 68).  
If neither the [Input] nor [Mode] button  
is illuminated, the input source and  
remote controller mode are selected  
simultaneously. If either button is illu-  
minated, press the illuminated button  
first.  
[THX] button  
or  
This button selects the THX listening modes. With 2-  
channel input sources, THX can be applied to Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie or DTS Neo:6 Cinema.  
Remote  
controller  
The THX listening modes can be selected if the current  
input source is either analog or digital. If it’s digital, you  
can use this button to apply THX to DTS or DTS-ES (see  
“Using the Digital Surround Modes” on page 60).  
Start playback on the selected AV  
component.  
2
3
DSP [ ]/[ ] buttons  
On the DTR-8.4, use the [Direct/  
Pure Audio], [Stereo], [Sur-  
These buttons are used to select Onkyo’s own DSP lis-  
tening modes—Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio Mix, etc.,  
and Mono or Theater-Dimensional.  
DTR-8.4  
Stereo Surround THX  
DSP  
round], [THX], or DSP [ ]/[  
buttons to select a listening  
mode.  
]
[All CH ST] button (remote controller)  
This button selects the All Ch Stereo listening mode.  
or  
On the remote controller, press  
the scroll wheel, and then use the  
[Surround], [THX], [All CH ST],  
[Stereo], [Pure A], [Direct], or  
DSP [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a  
listening mode.  
Remote  
controller  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 60 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
DTS/DTS-ES Discrete/DTS-ES Matrix  
Using the Digital Surround Modes  
If you are using surround back speakers, you can choose  
whether to use 6.1 channels or 5.1 channels to playback  
DTS material.  
This section explains functions that can be used when  
listening to Dolby Digital, and DTS formats.  
While listening to a DTS source, press the scroll  
wheel, and then use the [Surround] button to  
select: Auto, On, or Off.  
Auto: If the source signal contains a DTS-ES flag, the  
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix listening  
mode is selected automatically. If not, the DTS  
listening mode (5.1 channels) is used.  
Scroll  
wheel  
On: If the source signal contains a DTS-ES flag, the  
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix listening  
mode is selected automatically. If not,  
Surround  
THX  
DTS+Neo:6 (6.1 channels) is used.  
Off: The DTS listening mode (5.1 channels) is used  
for all DTS sources, even if a DTS-ES flag is  
present.  
THX Surround EX (Dolby Digital)  
If you are using surround back speakers, you can choose  
whether to playback a Dolby Digital source with THX  
Surround EX.  
While listening to a THX Surround EX source,  
press the scroll wheel, and then use the [THX]  
button to select: On, Off, or Auto.  
On: The THX Surround EX listening mode is used  
regardless of whether the source signal con-  
tains an EX flag.  
Off: The THX Cinema listening mode is used even  
if an EX flag is present.  
Auto: If the source signal contains an EX flag, the  
THX Surround EX listening mode is selected  
automatically. If not, the THX Cinema mode is  
used.  
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX  
If you are using surround back speakers, you can choose  
whether to use 6.1 channels or 5.1 channels to playback  
Dolby Digital material. However, if the surround chan-  
nel information is mono, or there is no audio in the sur-  
round channel, 5.1 channels will be used regardless.  
While listening to a Dolby Digital source, press  
the scroll wheel, and then use the [Surround]  
button to select: On, Off, or Auto.  
On: The Dolby Digital EX listening mode (6.1  
channels) is used regardless of whether the  
source signal contains a Dolby Digital EX flag.  
Off: The Dolby Digital listening mode (5.1 chan-  
nels) is used even if a Dolby Digital EX flag is  
present.  
Auto: If the source signal contains a Dolby Digital  
EX flag, the Dolby Digital EX listening mode  
(6.1 channels) is used. If there is no Dolby Dig-  
ital EX flag, the Dolby Digital listening mode  
(5.1 channels) is used.  
THX Cinema (DTS/DTS-ES)  
You can choose whether to use THX with DTS 5.1 chan-  
nel playback and DTS-ES 6.1 channel playback.  
While listening to a DTS or DTS-ES source,  
press the scroll wheel, and then use the [THX]  
button to select: Auto, On, or Off.  
Auto: If the source signal contains a DTS-ES flag, the  
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix listening  
mode is selected automatically. If not, the DTS  
listening mode (5.1 channels) is used.  
On: If the source signal contains a DTS-ES flag, the  
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix listening  
mode is selected automatically. If not, DTS+  
Neo:6 (6.1 channels) is used.  
Off: The DTS listening mode (5.1 channels) is used  
for all DTS sources, even if a DTS-ES flag is  
present.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 61 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
PCM Input Sources  
Display Indicators & Source Info  
1
Sampling rate*  
Input source  
When the format of a digital input signal is recognized,  
depending on the format, one of the indicators shown  
below will appear on the display.  
Input source &  
listening mode  
1
Sampling rate  
DIGITAL  
PCM96K  
MP3  
WMA  
Other Digital Input Sources  
Input signal &  
surround format*  
Input source  
1, 2  
DTS  
ES  
96/24  
Discrete  
Matrix  
Input source &  
listening mode  
Input signal &  
surround format*  
1, 2  
When you select one of the listening modes, one of the  
indicators shown below will appear on the display.  
Dolby Pro logic II  
selected  
Dolby Digital EX  
selected  
Onkyo DSP mode  
selected  
Stereo mode  
selected  
A
B
C
*:1. If the input signal doesn’t contain the information,  
nothing will be displayed. The sampling rate or surround  
format is displayed for about three seconds. After that,  
the previously displayed information reappears.  
*:2. Surround Format Display  
This section explains the surround format indication  
(e.g., 3/2.1).  
DTS  
selected  
Neo:6  
selected  
Direct mode  
selected  
THX Surround EX  
selected  
A: the number of front channels.  
3: front left, center, and front right.  
2: front left and front right.  
1: one channel.  
Note:  
When playing a Dolby Digital source, the message “Dia-  
log Norm xx” may appear on the display, “xx” being a  
number. Dialog normalization is a function of Dolby  
Digital that is used to correct the playback level of  
soundtracks that have been recorded at an unusually high  
or low level. It works automatically and no user interven-  
tion is required. It appears on the display just to let you  
know that it’s working. It’s unaffected by the DTR-8.4’s  
volume control.  
B: the number of surround channels.  
3: surround left, surround right, and surround  
back.  
2: surround left and surround right.  
1: one channel.  
C: the presence of an LFE (Low Frequency Effect)  
channel.  
1: yes.  
Nothing means no.  
Displaying Source Information  
You can display various  
information about the cur-  
Remote  
controller  
DTR-8.4  
For example, 3/2.1 indicates the input source has 5.1  
channels, consisting of three front channels, two sur-  
round channels, and an LFE channel. Likewise, 3/3.1  
indicates the input source has 6.1 channels, consisting of  
three front channels, two surround channels, a surround  
back channel, and an LFE channel.  
Display  
rently selected input  
source by first pressing  
the scroll wheel, and then  
pressing the [Display]  
button repeatedly.  
Analog Input Sources  
AM or FM Input Source  
Input source &  
Input source  
Band, frequency  
& preset #  
Band &  
listening mode  
listening mode  
ch  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 62 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Basic Operation—Continued  
Using the Re-EQ function  
With the Re-EQ function you can correct a soundtrack  
whose high-frequency content is too harsh, making it  
more suitable for home theater viewing.  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Mono, Stereo, All Ch St, Dolby Digital, Dolby  
Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, DTS, DTS-ES,  
DTS Neo:6 Cinema, THX Cinema, and THX Surround  
EX.  
Scroll wheel  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
1
press the [Re-EQ] button.  
Press the button again to turn off the  
Re-EQ function.  
Level – +  
Re-EQ  
CH SEL  
L Night  
Notes:  
• The Re-EQ function can also be set on the onscreen  
setup menus (see page 69).  
• When the listening mode is THX, the default setting is  
On. When the DTR-8.4 is set to Standby, it returns to  
the default setting.  
Adjusting the Volume of Individual  
Speakers  
• When the listening mode is not THX, the default set-  
ting is Off.  
With this function you can adjust the volume of each  
speaker individually. These adjustments are not saved  
and the previous settings will be resumed when the  
DTR-8.4 is set to Standby.  
Using the Late Night function  
(Dolby Digital only)  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
use the [CH SEL] button to select  
each speaker.  
Speakers are selected in the following  
order.  
1
With the Late Night function you can reduce the  
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can  
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume  
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you  
don’t want to disturb anyone.  
Front left  
Center  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
Surr right  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [L Night] button repeat-  
edly to select:  
Off: Late Night function off.  
Low: Small reduction in dynamic  
range.  
High: Large reduction in dynamic  
range.  
1
Surr back  
left  
Surr back  
right  
Surr left  
Use the [Level–] and [Level+] but-  
tons to adjust the volume.  
The volume can be adjusted from –12  
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
2
Notes:  
• The Late Night function can also be set on the  
onscreen setup menus (see page 69).  
Note:  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
Dolby Digital material that you are playing, and with  
some material there will be little or no effect.  
You cannot select speakers that are set to No or None  
on the Speaker Configuration menu (see page 41).  
• The Late Night function is turned off when the  
DTR-8.4 is set to Standby.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 63 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Operation  
Using the Multichannel Input  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
3
4
This section explains how to use the multichannel analog  
input. Connecting the 5.1 or 7.1 analog outputs of your  
DVD player to the multichannel analog input allows you  
to enjoy DVD-Audio discs and Super Audio CDs, pro-  
viding that your DVD player supports those formats. See  
page 29 for connection details.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Setting the Multichannel Input  
Before using the multichannel input, you need to assign  
it to an input source. By default, it’s assigned to the DVD  
input source, as shown in the following table, so if you  
connect a DVD player to the multichannel input, no fur-  
ther settings are required.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Multichannel  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
Note:  
The Multichannel Setup menu appears.  
• The Net-Tune input source cannot be set to Yes.  
Advanced Menu  
Input source  
DVD  
Default setting  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
Yes  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
2-2.Multichannel Setup  
Input:DVD  
VIDEO 1  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 3  
VIDEO 4  
VIDEO 5  
CD  
a.Multichannel :Yes  
Quit:|SETUP|  
PHONO  
TUNER  
TAPE  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
5
Yes: Assigned to multichannel  
analog input.  
No: Not assigned to multichannel  
analog input.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
1
2
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
6
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 64 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Operation—Continued  
ing mode is being used when the multichannel input is  
selected, that listening mode is cancelled.  
Selecting the Multichannel Input  
This section explains how to select the multichannel ana-  
log input for playback.  
• Press the [Surround] button to adjust a bass and treble  
effect (“Tone On” appears on the display).  
Adjusting the Volume of Individual  
Speakers for the Multichannel Input  
1, 2  
1
While using the multichannel input, you can adjust the  
volume of each speaker individually.  
4
1
2
2
1
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select  
“DVD.”  
1
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
use the [CH SEL] button to select  
each speaker.  
1
Speakers are selected in the following  
order.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Audio SEL] button  
repeatedly to select “Multich. ”  
2
Front left  
Center  
Front right  
Subwoofer  
Surr right  
Surr back  
left  
Surr back  
right  
Surr left  
Start playback on your DVD  
player.  
3
Use the [Level–] and [Level+] but-  
tons to adjust the volume.  
The volume can be adjusted from –12  
to +12 dB in 1 dB steps (–30 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
2
To adjust the volume, use the  
4
Master Volume control, or the  
remote controller’s [VOL] button.  
The volume can be set from 0 to 100.  
Note:  
You cannot select speakers that are set to No or None  
on the Speaker Configuration menu (see page 41).  
• These settings are not the same as the level calibration  
settings on page 44.  
• These settings affect only the multichannel input  
source and have no effect on other input sources.  
Notes:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons and [Audio Selector]  
button.  
You can only use the Direct and Pure Audio listening  
modes with the multichannel input. If another listen-  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 65 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Operation—Continued  
Recording a Separate Input Source  
Recording  
While enjoying one input source, you can record from a  
separate input source. You could, for example, watch a  
DVD while recording a CD to tape.  
This section explains how to record the current input  
source, how to record an input source while listening or  
watching another input source, and how to record from  
separate audio and video sources.  
Rec Out  
Press the [Rec Out] button.  
1
Unless you have the full consent of the copyright  
holder, copyright laws prohibit using your recordings  
for anything other than personal enjoyment!  
Notes:  
Within eight seconds, press the  
2
DVD  
Video 3  
Tape  
CD  
Video 1  
Video 4  
Tuner  
Video 2  
Video 5  
Phono  
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot  
be recorded.  
input selector button for the  
input source that you want to  
record.  
The name of the input source selected  
for recording appears on the display.  
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.  
You cannot record from the multichannel input.  
• Digital audio fed to the DIGITAL IN COAX/OPT  
inputs is output by the DIGITAL OUT OPT outputs.  
MP3, WAV, and other files played over Net-Tune are  
output only by the analog audio outputs.  
Net Audio  
The specified input source can now be  
recorded by the recorder connected to  
the TAPE OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, or  
VIDEO 2 OUT outputs.  
Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to  
the manuals supplied with your digital recording  
equipment for more details.  
Start recording on the recorder.  
See your recorder’s manual for more  
information.  
3
4
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-  
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the  
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from  
digital to analog or vice versa.  
Start playback on the source AV  
component.  
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t  
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.  
Notes:  
• Since the Zone 2 function and the REC OUT outputs  
use the same circuitry, you cannot record from sepa-  
rate sources and use Zone 2 at the same time.  
• To turn off the REC OUT outputs (i.e., TAPE OUT,  
VIDEO 1 OUT, or VIDEO 2 OUT), press the [Rec  
Out] button, and then press the [Off] button within  
eight seconds.  
Recording the Current Input Source  
You can record the current input source as follows.  
Use the input selector buttons to  
select the AV component that  
you want to record.  
1
Press the [Rec Out] button  
repeatedly until “Rec Sel:  
2
Rec Out  
SOURCE” appears on the dis-  
play.  
Tip: Press the [Rec Out] button twice  
to quickly select “SOURCE.”  
The current input source can now be  
recorded by the recorder connected to  
the TAPE OUT, VIDEO 1 OUT, or  
VIDEO 2 OUT outputs.  
Start recording on the recorder.  
See your recorder’s manual for more  
information.  
3
Start playback on the source AV  
component.  
4
If you select another input source dur-  
ing recording, the newly selected input  
source will be recorded.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 66 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Operation—Continued  
Recording Separate AV Sources  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “3. Video Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
4
You can record audio and video from separate sources,  
allowing you to dub audio onto your video recordings. In  
the following example, audio from the CD player con-  
nected to the CD IN input, and video from the camcorder  
connected to the VIDEO 5 INPUT VIDEO input are  
recorded to the VCR connected to the VIDEO 1 OUT  
output.  
The Video Setup menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
2-3.Video Setup  
Input:CD  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
Standby  
a.Video  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
:Last Valid  
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Selector  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
b.Component Video  
:Last Valid  
Video  
5
Input  
Phones  
Zone  
2
Level  
Rec Out  
Zone  
2
Off  
Stereo  
Surround  
THX  
DSP  
Dimmer  
Memory FM Mode  
Clear  
Setup  
Tuning  
Enter  
Preset  
Return  
Digital  
S
Video  
Video  
L
Audio  
R
Quit:|SETUP|  
7
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Video,and  
then use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select “VIDEO5.”  
Press the [Setup] button to close the  
setup menu.  
5
1, 2  
3, 4  
]
1
3–5  
2, 5  
Prepare your CD player and cam-  
corder for playback, and your  
VCR for recording.  
6
7
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
CD input source.  
1
2
3
Press the [Rec Out] button  
repeatedly until “Rec Sel:  
SOURCE” appears on the dis-  
play.  
Audio from the CD player and video  
from the camcorder can now be  
recorded by the VCR connected to the  
VIDEO 1 OUT outputs.  
DTR-8.4  
Rec Out  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Start recording on the VCR and  
start playback on the camcorder  
and CD player.  
8
Note:  
• For advanced audio dubbing, if you assign theVIDEO  
5 INPUT VIDEO input to an additional input source,  
say, the TAPE IN input, you can dub audio from two  
sources and use the [CD] and [Tape] input selector  
buttons to switch between them during recording.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 67 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup  
Assigning Listening Modes to Input Sources  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set them.  
5
6
You can assign a listening mode to an each input source so  
that it’s selected automatically each time you select that  
input source. This is useful when you regularly use, say,  
the Dolby Digital listening mode with your DVD player.  
The settings are explained below.  
1, 2  
1
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
3, 4  
3–5  
2, 6  
a. Analog/PCM  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when an analog (CD, TV, LD, VHS, MD, vinyl,  
radio, cassette, cable, satellite, etc) or PCM digital (CD,  
DVD, digital cable/satellite, etc) audio signal is played.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
1
Only listening modes that can be used with analog or  
PCM signal formats can be selected.  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
b. PCM fs = 96k  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when a PCM 96 kHz digital audio signal is played  
(DVD, etc).  
Only listening modes that can be used with the PCM  
96 kHz signal format can be selected.  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If the Basic menu appears, use the  
Down [ ] button to select Advanced  
Menu, and press the [Enter] button to  
display the Advanced menu.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
c. Dolby D  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when a Dolby Digital format digital audio signal is  
played (DVD, digital cable/satellite, etc).  
Only listening modes that can be used with Dolby Digi-  
tal can be selected.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
d. DTS  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when a DTS format digital audio signal is played  
(DVD, LD, CD, etc).  
Only listening modes that can be used with DTS can be  
selected.  
4
tons to select6. Listening Mode  
Preset,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
The Listening Mode Preset menu  
appears.  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
e. D.F. 2ch  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when a 2-channel (2/0) digital audio signal (PCM,  
Dolby Digital, DTS) is played (DVD, digital cable/satel-  
lite, etc).  
2-6.ListeningMode Preset  
Input:DVD  
a.Analog/PCM  
:Stereo  
b.PCM fs=96k :Stereo  
c.Dolby D :Dolby D  
d.DTS  
:DTS  
Only listening modes that can be used with 2-channel  
digital audio can be selected.  
e.D.F.2ch  
:PLII  
f.D.F.Mono:Mono  
Quit:|SETUP|  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 68 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
f. D.F. Mono  
The 12V Trigger Setup menu appears.  
With this setting you can specify the listening mode to be  
used when a mono digital audio signal is played (DVD,  
etc).  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
Only listening modes that can be used with mono PCM,  
Dolby Digital, or DTS can be selected.  
2-7.12V Trigger Setup  
Input:DVD  
• The Last Valid option means that the listening mode  
selected last will be used.  
a.Trigger A  
:On  
b.Trigger B  
:Off  
Notes:  
• The b, c, d, e, and f settings are available only when an  
digital audio input is assigned to the selected input  
source.  
Quit:|SETUP|  
You can select other listening modes during playback  
(see page 59), however, the listening mode assigned  
here will be resumed after the DTR-8.4 has been set to  
Standby.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select a.Trigger A or b.  
Trigger B, and use the Left/Right  
5
6
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
On: Trigger output active while  
input source selected.  
Assigning the A & B 12V Trigger Outputs  
This section explains how to assign input sources to the  
12V TRIGGER OUT A and B outputs.  
Off: Trigger output not active  
while input source selected.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to assign.  
1
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Audio Adjust Functions  
This section explains the audio and listening mode set-  
tings you can use to tailor the sound as you like.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
1
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “3. Audio Adjust,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
The Audio Adjust menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
4
tons to select 7. 12V Trigger  
Setup, and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 69 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
3-3. Sound Effect  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select the menu items,  
and then press the [Enter] button.  
The Tone Control menu is shown here.  
a. Re-EQ  
This is the same as the Re-EQ function explained on  
page 62. This function can be used with the following  
listening modes: Mono, Stereo,All Ch St, Dolby Digital,  
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, DTS,  
DTS-ES, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema.  
Advanced Menu  
3.Audio Adjust  
3-1.Tone Control  
b. Upsampling  
With the Upsampling function you can double the sam-  
pling rate for more detailed playback. Upsampling can  
be used with the following listening modes: Stereo and  
Dolby Pro Logic II.  
a.Bass  
:
:
0
0
b.Treble  
On: Sampling rate doubled. (UPSAMPLING indi-  
cator lights up.)  
Quit:|SETUP|  
Off: Upsampling function off.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set them.  
4
c. Double Bass  
With the Double Bass function you can boost the bass out-  
put by feeding the bass sounds of the front left and right  
channels to the subwoofer. This function can be used only  
if the Speaker Config menu Subwoofer setting is set toYes,  
and the Front L/R setting is set to Large (see page 41).  
On: Double Bass function on (default).  
The settings are explained below.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Off: Double Bass function off.  
5
d. Late Night  
This is the same as the Late Night function explained on  
page 62. It can be used only when the listening mode is  
Dolby Digital.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
3-4. Delay  
a. A/V Sync  
When using progressive scanning, you may find that the  
picture and sound are out of sync. With the A/V Sync  
function you can delay the audio in 0.5 ms steps from 0  
to 74.0 ms to get the picture and audio back in sync. The  
default setting is 0 ms.  
3-1.Tone Control  
a. Bass  
You can adjust the bass for the front left, right, and center  
speakers and subwoofer in 2 dB steps from –12 to  
+12 dB. The default setting is 0 dB. The bass cannot be  
adjusted while the Direct, Pure Audio, or THX listening  
mode is selected.  
Note:  
• If a delay time between 24.5 ms and 74 ms is set, and  
then the Upsampling function is turned on, the delay  
time will be fixed at 24.0 ms, however, the value  
shown on the display will not change.  
• This function cannot be used with the multichannel  
input.  
b.Treble  
You can adjust the treble for the front left, right, and center  
speakers in 2 dB steps from –12 to +12 dB. The default  
setting is 0 dB. The treble cannot be adjusted while the  
Direct, Pure Audio, or THX listening mode is selected.  
b. Relative Delay  
With Integra/Onkyo’s unique Enhanced Spatial Posi-  
tioning Algorithm you can fine-tune the sound field by  
delaying the signals to all speakers in 0.5 ms steps from  
–4.0 ms to +6.0 ms (default is 0 ms). This 10 ms range  
equates to a physical speaker movement of 10 feet (3 m).  
Before adjusting this setting, specify the distance  
between the listening position and each individual  
speaker (see page 43), and adjust the level of each  
speaker individually (see page 44).  
By increasing the distance between the speakers (i.e.,  
increasing the delay time), the sound field can be broad-  
ened, and by reducing the distance (i.e., reducing the  
delay time), the sound field can be narrowed.  
3-2. Surround Speakers  
a. Surround Speakers  
If you are using surround back speakers, you can choose  
which surround speakers to use when playing 5.1 mate-  
rial. This setting can be used with the following listening  
modes: DTS, DTS96/24, Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro  
Logic II, THX Cinema (PL II), Mono Movie, Orchestra,  
Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic.  
Surround L/R: Use only the surround left and right  
speakers.  
Surround Back: Use only the surround back left and  
right speakers.  
The procedure for changing these settings is provided  
on page 68.  
Surr L/R+back: Use the surround left and right and  
surround back left and right speakers.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 70 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
3-5. LFE Level  
3-7.Theater-Dimensional  
These settings are used with the Theater-Dimensional  
listening mode.  
a. Dolby Digital  
With this setting you can adjust the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel for Dolby Digital  
sources in 1 dB steps from –10 dB to 0 dB (default is  
0 dB).  
If you find that the low-frequency effects are too loud  
when playing Dolby Digital sources, lower this setting as  
necessary.  
a. Listening Angle  
With this setting you can specify the angle of the front  
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.  
Processing for the Theater-Dimensional listening mode  
is based on this setting. Ideally, the front left and right  
speakers should be equidistant from the listening posi-  
tion and at an angle close to one of the two available set-  
tings.  
b. DTS  
With this setting you can adjust the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel for DTS sources in  
1 dB steps from –10 dB to 0 dB (default is 0 dB).  
If you find that the low-frequency effects are too loud  
when playing DTS sources, lower this setting as neces-  
sary.  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
20/40˚  
3-6. Mono  
20º: Select if listening angle is 20 degrees.  
40º: Select if listening angle is 40 degrees (default).  
a. Academy Filter  
Early movies had a mono soundtrack that suffered from  
audible hiss and a poor high-frequency response due to  
the quality of the film. To improve matters, the high-fre-  
quencies were boosted before being recorded onto film,  
and then attenuated to their original levels during play-  
back in the movie theater. Some old movies have been  
transferred to newer distribution media without the high-  
frequencies being attenuated, creating a harsh sound  
with pronounced hiss. With theAcademy Filter function,  
which is based on the playback techniques used in those  
days, you can attenuate the high-frequencies to their  
original levels and enjoy the movie as it was intended to  
be heard.  
b. Center  
With this setting you can specify whether or not you’re  
using a center speaker. If you are, the center channel  
sound will be output by the center speaker when using  
the Theater-Dimensional listening mode. This reduces  
the workload of the front left and right speakers, and cre-  
ates a more articulate sound space. In this case, the set-  
tings for the distance between the listening position and  
each individual speaker (see page 43), and the level of  
each speaker (see page 44) are important, so be sure to  
set them.  
On: Select if using a center speaker.  
Off: Select if not using a center speaker (default).  
On: Academy Filter on.  
Off: Academy Filter off (default).  
c. Front Expander  
With the Front Expander function you can broaden the  
width the front stereo image. This can be useful with nar-  
row listening angles of 20 degrees or less.  
On: Front Expander function on.  
b. Input Channel  
With this setting you can specify how 2-channel sources  
are handled in the Mono listening mode.  
AUTO L+R: The front left and right speakers output  
the same mix of the left and right channels  
(default).  
Off: Front Expander function off (default).  
d. Virtual Surr Level  
With this setting you can adjust the level of the virtual  
surround sound from –3 dB to +3 dB (default is 0 dB). If  
the clarity is poor, or the effect sounds unnatural, you  
may be able to improve it by lowering this setting.  
Left: The front left and right speakers output the  
sound recorded in the left channel. Use  
this option with material that has different  
languages recorded in the left and right  
channels.  
Right: The front left and right speakers output the  
sound recorded in the right channel. Use  
this option with material that has different  
languages recorded in the left and right  
channels.  
e. Dialog Enhance  
With this function you can improve the clarity of the cen-  
ter channel, which usually contains dialog.  
On: Dialog Enhance function on.  
Off: Dialog Enhance function off (default).  
The procedure for changing these settings is provided  
on page 68.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 71 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is  
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the  
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when  
the listening position is considerably off center. When  
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-  
ated, maintaining the original stereo sound balance.  
3-8. Surround  
These settings are for the surround sound modes.  
a. Surr Mode (Analog/PCM)  
This setting determines the default surround format to be  
used with analog and PCM input signals. The available  
options are: Pro Logic II Movie (default), Pro Logic II  
Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and Neo:6 Music.  
3-9.THX  
b. Surr Mode (D.F. 2ch)  
These settings are for the THX modes.  
This setting determines the default surround format that  
will be used with 2-channel digital signals other than  
PCM. The available options are: Pro Logic II Movie  
(default), Pro Logic II Music, Neo:6 Cinema, and Neo:6  
Music.  
a. Re-EQ (THX)  
This setting determines the default on/off setting for the  
Re-EQ function, which is explained on page 62. This  
setting is used only when a THX listening mode is  
selected.  
c. Dolby D EX (Dolby D)  
b. Decoder (2ch)  
This is the same as “Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX” on  
page 60. It can be set even while a listening mode other  
than Dolby is selected.  
This setting determines whether THX Cinema should be  
applied to the Dolby Pro Logic II Movie or Neo:6 Cin-  
ema listening mode when THX is used with a 2-channel  
input signal.  
d. DTS-ES  
This is the same as “DTS/DTS-ES Discrete/DTS-ES  
Matrix” on page 60. It can be set even while a listening  
mode other than DTS is selected.  
PL II Movie: Apply to Dolby Pro Logic II Movie.  
Neo:6 Cinema: Apply to Neo:6 Cinema.  
c.THX Surr EX (Dolby D)  
e. Pro Logic II Music Panorama  
With this function you can broaden the width of the front  
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic II Music  
listening mode.  
This is the same as see “THX Surround EX (Dolby Dig-  
ital)” on page 60. It can be set even while a listening  
mode other than Dolby is selected.  
d. DTS-ES  
On: Panorama function on.  
Off: Panorama function off (default).  
This is the same as see “THX Cinema (DTS/DTS-ES)”  
on page 60. It can be set even while a listening mode  
other than DTS is selected.  
f. Pro Logic II Music Dimension  
With this setting you can move the sound field forward  
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic II Music  
listening mode. The default setting is 3. Lower settings  
move the sound field forward. Higher settings move it  
backward.  
3-10. Mono Movie, 3-11. Enhance,  
3-12. Orchestra, 3-13. Unplugged,  
3-14. Studio-Mix, 3-15.TV Logic  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
These settings are for the DSP listening modes.  
a. Front Effect  
With this setting you can turn off the reverb for the front  
speakers. This is useful when playing live material that  
already contains live reverberation and the reverb added  
by the DSP listening mode simply blurs the original  
sound. When the Front Effect is turned off, no reverb is  
added to the front left, right, and center speakers and the  
original reverberation can be heard as it is.  
On: Front Effect on (default).  
g. Pro Logic II Music Center Width  
With this setting you can adjust the width of the sound  
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
II Music listening mode.  
If you’re using a center speaker, with Dolby Pro Logic II,  
the center channel sound is output by only the center  
speaker. (If you’re not using a center speaker, the center  
channel sound will be distributed to the front left and  
right speakers to create a phantom center). This setting  
controls the front left, right, and center mix, allowing  
you to adjust the weight of the center channel sound. It  
can be adjusted from 0 to 7 (default is 3).  
Off: Front Effect off.  
b. Reverb Level  
With this setting you can adjust the amount of reverb to  
suit your listening environment, source material, and so  
on. The available settings are: Low, Middle (default),  
and High.  
c. Reverb Time  
h. Neo:6 Music Center Image  
With this setting you can adjust the reverb time to suit  
your listening environment, source material, and so on.  
The available settings are: Short, Middle (default), and  
Long.  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel  
surround sound from 2-channel (stereo) material. With  
this setting you can specify by how much the front left  
and right channel output is attenuated in order to create  
the center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5 (default  
is 3).  
The procedure for changing these settings is provided  
on page 68.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 72 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
4-1. Volume Setup  
Setting Preferences  
a. Volume Display  
This section explains the items on the Preference menu.  
With this preference you can choose how the volume  
level is displayed.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
1
press the [Setup] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Absolute: Display range is 0 to 100.  
Relative: Display range is –dB, –81 dB, –80 dB  
through +16 dB, +17 dB, and Max.  
The absolute value 82 is equal to the relative value 0 dB.  
b. Muting Level  
This setting determines the volume level while the  
DTR-8.4 is muted (see page 52). It can be set to –dB  
(default) or between –50 dB and –10 dB in 10 dB steps.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “4. Preference,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
c. Maximum Volume  
With this preference you can prevent the volume being  
set too high by specifying a maximum volume level.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is from 50 to 99. When it’s set to Relative, the  
range is –32 dB through +17 dB. To specify no maxi-  
mum volume, select “Off.”  
The Preference menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
4.Preference  
4-1.Volume Setup  
d. Power On Volume  
a.Volume Display  
:Absolute  
With this preference you can specify the volume setting  
to be used each time the DTR-8.4 is turned on.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is from 0 to 100. When it’s set to Relative, the  
range is –dB, –81 dB through +18 dB. To use the same  
volume level that was used when the DTR-8.4 was  
turned off, select “Last.”  
b.Muting Level  
:-oodB  
c.Maximum Volume  
:Off  
d.Power On Volume  
:Last  
Quit:|SETUP|  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select the menu items,  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
4-2. Headphones Level  
a. Headphones Level  
With this preference you can specify the headphone vol-  
ume relative to the main volume. This is useful if there’s  
a volume difference between your speakers and your  
headphones. The headphone volume can be set between  
–12 dB and +12 dB.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
4
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set them.  
The settings are explained below.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 73 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
4-3. OSD Setup  
Naming Presets & Input Sources  
a. Background Color  
This section explains how to name radio presets and  
input sources. Names may consist of up to 10 characters.  
With this preference you can select a background color  
for the onscreen setup menus (OSD). The available col-  
ors are: Blue 1, Blue 2, Green 1, Green 2, Magenta,  
Red 1, or Red 2.  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
1
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to name.  
If you want to name a radio preset,  
select that preset.  
b. Component Video  
This preference determines whether or not the onscreen  
setup menus (OSD) are displayed on the TV connected  
to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT.  
OSD On: OSD displayed.  
OSD Off: OSD not displayed.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
c. Immediate Display  
This preference determines whether or not actions, such  
as selecting an input source, are displayed onscreen.  
On: Actions displayed.  
The Basic menu appears onscreen.  
Off: Actions not displayed.  
While a video signal from a video component is being  
output, actions are not displayed onscreen even if this  
preference is set to On.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
d. Display Position  
With this preference you can specify the position  
onscreen where you want actions (Immediate Display)  
to be displayed. There are ten positions from the top to  
the bottom of the screen.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
4-4. OSD Position  
OSD Position  
With this preference you can specify the position  
onscreen where you want the onscreen setup menus  
(OSD) to appear. Use the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons to  
specify the position.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
4
tons to select “4. Character  
Input,and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
The Character Input menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
2-4.Character Input  
Input:DVD  
a.Character Display  
:No  
b.Character  
:
Press  
to edit.  
to clear.  
Quit:|SETUP|  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Character Dis-  
play,and use the Left/Right [ ]/  
5
[
] buttons to select “Yes.”  
When this setting is set to No, the  
default name is displayed. It must be set  
to Yes to display your custom name.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 74 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
The Basic menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
3
6
tons to select “b. Character,and  
press the Right [ ] button to  
open the character input window.  
To delete the previous name, press the  
Left [ ] button.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Use the [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select a character, and then  
press the [Enter] button.  
To move the cursor to the left, press the  
[Return] button. To move it to the right,  
press the [Enter] button. To delete a  
character, enter a space “–.”  
7
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “5. IntelliVolume,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
4
Repeat step 7 until you’ve  
entered all 10 characters.  
The previous menu reappears.  
8
If the name you are entering consists  
of less than 10 characters, enter spaces  
“–” at the end to make it up to 10.  
The IntelliVolume menu appears.  
Advanced Menu  
2.Input Setup  
Input:DVD  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
9
2-5.IntelliVolume Setup  
Input:DVD  
a.IntelliVolume  
: 0dB  
Note:  
Quit:|SETUP|  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons, [Setup] button,  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to specify the level.  
The level can be set from –12 dB to  
+12 dB.  
5
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
Using IntelliVolume  
With the IntelliVolume function you can specify an input  
level for each input source. This is useful if some of your  
AV components are louder or quieter than others.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
6
Press the [Input] button,and then  
1
roll the scroll wheel to select the  
input source you want to set.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons, [Setup] button,  
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 75 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune  
About Net-Tune  
Network Requirements  
The DTR-8.4 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a stan-  
dard Ethernet network, allowing you to play music  
(MP3, WAV) stored on your network audio server  
through the DTR-8.4. If your network is connected to the  
Internet, you can also tune into Internet radio stations.  
Ethernet Network  
The DTR-8.4’s Ethernet port supports 10Base-T. For  
best results, a 100Base-T switched Ethernet network is  
recommended.Although it’s theoretically possible to use  
a wireless network, due to unpredictable performance, it  
may not provide satisfactory results, so a wired network  
is recommended.  
Internet Radio  
With Internet radio you can:  
Ethernet Router  
• Listen to stations that use MP3 format streaming.  
• Select stations by genre, location, or language.  
• Preset up to 30 Internet radio stations.  
A router manages the network, routing data and supply-  
ing IP addresses.Your router must support the following:  
• NAT (Network Address Translation). NAT allows sev-  
eral networked computers to access the Internet simul-  
taneously via a single Internet connection. The  
DTR-8.4 needs Internet access for Internet radio.  
• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).  
DHCP supplies IP address information to network  
devices, allowing them to configure themselves auto-  
matically.  
Net-Tune  
For audio delivery over Ethernet, Onkyo developed  
NTSP (Net-Tune System Protocol). Since it’s based on  
the industry standard TCP/IP protocol, it’s efficient and  
very responsive.  
• A router with a 100Base-TX switch built-in is recom-  
mended.  
The network audio server supports the MP3 and WAV  
formats.  
Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs  
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your  
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
WAV: high-quality, uncompressed, linear PCM.  
MP3: high-quality, compressed, small file size.  
For more information about Net-Tune, see the following  
Integra Web sites.  
CAT5 Ethernet cable  
Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable (straight-type).  
• http://www.integrahometheater.com/  
Internet Access (for Internet radio)  
To use Internet radio, your Ethernet network must have  
Internet access. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,  
56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results,  
so a broadband connection is strongly recommended  
(e.g., cable modem, xDSL modem, etc). Please consult  
your ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 76 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Notes:  
• To use Internet radio with the DTR-8.4, your broad-  
band Internet connection needs to be up and running  
and able to access the Web. Please consult your ISP if  
you have any problems with your Internet connection.  
• The DTR-8.4 does not support PPPoE settings, so if  
you have a PPPoE-type Internet connection, you must  
use a PPPoE-compatible router.  
• Depending on your ISP, you may need to specify a  
proxy server to use Internet radio. If your PC is con-  
figured to use a proxy server, use the same settings  
(see page 82).  
• The DTR-8.4 uses DHCP and AutoIP to configure its  
network settings automatically. If you want to config-  
ure these settings manually, see page 82.  
NetworkingYour DTR-8.4  
To connect the DTR-8.4 to your Ethernet network, plug one end of a CAT5 Ethernet cable into the ETHERNET (Net-  
Tune) port, and plug the other end into a LAN port on your router or switch.  
The following diagram shows how you can connect the DTR-8.4 to your Ethernet network. Here it’s connected to a LAN  
port on the router, which has a 4-port 100Base-TX switch built-in.  
You can connect any number of DTR-8.4s to the network, and the network audio server can serve up to three clients  
simultaneously, so you can enjoy Net-Tune in three separate rooms simultaneously. The following diagram shows a Net-  
Tune network with two DTR-8.4s.  
DTR-8.4  
Network audio server  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 8.4  
RATING: AC120V 60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
R
L
LAN/  
Ethernet  
port  
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
I
R
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12  
V
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
Internet radio  
Internet radio  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
Modem  
Modem  
Router  
WAN port  
WAN port  
LAN port  
LAN port  
LAN port  
LAN port  
LAN port  
Router  
LAN/  
Ethernet  
port  
Network audio server  
Room 1  
Room 2  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 77 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Using Internet Radio  
If you select Language:  
When the Language menu appears, use  
the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select a language.  
If no information is found, “No List”  
appears onscreen. In this case, press the  
Left [ ] button to return to the previ-  
ous menu.  
This section explains how to use Internet radio. You can  
select stations by genre, location, or language.  
To use Internet radio, you must connect the DTR-8.4 to  
a network with Internet access (see page 75).  
Press the [Enter] button.  
A list of available radio stations appears  
onscreen.  
4
5
1
3, 4, 6  
2, 3, 5  
1
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select a radio station.  
To return to the previous menu, press  
the Left [ ] button.  
While either the [Input] button  
1
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,  
rolling the scroll wheel to select  
IRD (Internet Radio).  
Press the [Enter] button.  
6
“NET-T” appears on the bottom line.  
If the Internet Radio menu doesn’t  
appear onscreen, press the remote con-  
troller’s [Display] button.  
The DTR-8.4 connects to the selected  
radio station and begins buffering audio  
data, the progress of which is displayed  
in percent. When buffering reaches  
100%, playback starts.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select Genres, Location,  
or Language.  
To display information about the cur-  
rent radio station on the DTR-8.4, as  
shown below, use the Up/Down [ ]/  
i Net Radio(Menu)  
1.Genres  
2.Location  
3.Language  
[
] buttons. If no information is avail-  
able, “No Info” appears.  
If you’re using the onscreen display  
(OSD), the available information  
appears as shown below.  
Press the [Enter] button.  
3
The DTR-8.4 accesses the XiVA-Net  
online database to see what radio sta-  
tions are available. This may take  
awhile.  
iNet Radio Station ONK  
7ch  
Track:  
Station ONK Live  
Program:  
Station ONK Live  
Artist:  
If you select Genres:  
RealOnkyoNet.com  
Data:  
When the Genre menu appears, use the  
Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a  
genre, and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton. When the subgenre menu appears,  
use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select a subgenre.  
WMA 20kbps  
Tuned  
Note:  
• If you’re using a narrowband Internet connection (e.g.,  
56K modem, ISDN), depending on the station, Inter-  
net radio may not work satisfactorily. Use a broadband  
connection for best results (e.g., cable modem, xDSL  
modem, etc).  
If you select Location:  
When the Location menu appears, use  
the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select a location.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 78 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Presetting Internet Radio Stations  
Use the remote controller’s [CH/  
Disc] button to select the preset.  
2
You can store up to 30 Internet radio stations as presets.  
On the DTR-8.4, use the Preset  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select the  
presets.  
3
The station name is displayed for sev-  
eral seconds, and then the buffering  
progress is displayed.  
2
Select the Internet radio station  
that you want to preset.  
1
When buffering reaches 100%, play-  
back starts.  
Press the Right [ ] button.  
The preset number flashes for about  
five seconds.  
2
Deleting Internet Radio Presets  
This section explains how to delete Internet radio pre-  
sets.  
While the preset number is flash-  
ing, press the [Enter] button to  
store the preset.  
3
The preset number stops flashing.  
3
2
Selecting Internet Radio Presets  
You can select previously stored Internet radio presets as  
follows.  
Select the preset that you want to  
delete, as explained previously.  
1
1
Press the Right [ ] button.  
2
2
Press the [Enter] button to delete  
the preset.  
3
While either the [Input] button  
1
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,  
rolling the scroll wheel to select  
IRD (Internet Radio).  
The selected preset is deleted.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 79 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Playing network audio server Tracks  
Press the [Enter] or [ ] button to  
start playback.  
To display information about the cur-  
rent track on the DTR-8.4, as shown  
below, use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons.  
7
This section explains how to select and play tracks on a  
network audio server through the DTR-8.4. You can  
select tracks by album, artist, genre, or playlist.  
Turn on your network audio  
server.  
1
Information appears on the onscreen  
display (OSD) as shown below.  
Turn on the DTR-8.4.  
2
Music Server  
Track: 1/12  
Play  
While neither the [Input] button  
3
1m20s>  
nor [Mode] button is illuminated,  
roll the scroll wheel to select  
MSRV (Music Server).  
“NET-T” appears on the bottom line.  
While the DTR-8.4 connects to the net-  
work, and then the server, the messages  
“Network Starting...” and “Connect-  
ing...” appear.  
My sweet candy  
Album:  
My Best 100  
Artist:  
Happy PanPot  
Data:  
MP3 160kbps  
To return to the previous menu during  
playback, press the Left [ ] button.  
To stop or pause playback, press the  
remote controller’s Stop [ ] or Pause  
[ ] button respectively.  
When a connection is established, the  
track you played last time is selected  
ready for playback.  
To select the next track, press the Next  
[
] button. To select the beginning of  
the current track, press the Previous  
] button. To select the previous  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Display] button.  
The server menu appears onscreen.  
4
[
track, press the Previous [  
twice.  
] button  
You can select tracks by number during  
playback with the remote controller’s  
number buttons, as follows:  
Use the [Album], [Artist], [Genre],  
or [Playlist] button to select a  
menu.  
5
Alternatively, use the Up/Down  
To select track #3, press [3].  
To select track #10, press 0.  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a menu, and  
then press [Enter].  
To select track #37, press [CAPS],  
[3], and 7.  
The album, artist, genre, or playlist  
menu appears onscreen.  
To select track #123, press [CAPS]  
twice, and then [1], [2], and [3].  
If you selected the artist or genre menu,  
use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select an artist or genre, and then press  
[Enter]. A menu of tracks by that artist,  
or of that genre is displayed.  
To fast forward or fast reverse, press  
and hold the remote controller’s FF  
] or FR [ ] button respectively. If  
you fast reverse all the way to the  
beginning of a track, playback starts.  
[
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select items on the menu.  
You can select menu items by number  
or by first letter. See “Selecting Items  
by Letter” on page 80.  
6
Notes:  
• When you connect the DTR-8.4 to a network for the  
very first time, it connects to the first network audio  
server it finds. If you’re using several servers, use the  
Select Server setting to select another server (see  
page 81).  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 80 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
• If the message “No Tracks” appears, this means that  
no information can be retrieved from the network  
audio server. In this case, you need to record some  
music on your network audio server.  
Playing Net-Tune Tracks Randomly  
This section explains how to play a random selection of  
tracks from the current artist, album, genre, or playlist  
menu.  
• If the message “Disconnected” appears, this means  
that the DTR-8.4 cannot connect to the network audio  
server. In this case, check the network audio server,  
and DTR-8.4 connections. It may be that the DTR-8.4  
cannot find the network audio server that it used last  
time, in which case, use the Select Server setting to  
select another server (see page 81).  
While playback is stopped, press  
the remote controller’s [Random]  
button.  
1
Press the Play [ ] button to start  
random playback  
2
Selecting Items by Letter  
You can select items on the album, artist, genre, and  
playlist menus by entering the first letter of the item’s  
name.  
Select the album, artist, genre, or  
playlist menu, as explained previ-  
ously.  
1
Playing Net-Tune Tracks Repeatedly  
This section explains how to play one or all tracks on the  
current artist, album, genre, or playlist menu repeatedly.  
Press the remote controller’s  
[Caps] button repeatedly to  
select an input mode:  
2
Press the remote controller’s  
[Repeat] button repeatedly to  
select a repeat mode:  
1
Uppercase:  
In this mode, the number buttons input  
uppercase letters. For example, press  
the [2] button repeatedly to enter A, B,  
or C. The first item in the menu that  
begins with the entered letter will be  
selected.  
Repeat 1: Repeat the current track.  
Repeat All: Repeat all tracks on the  
current menu.  
Repeat Off: Repeat function off.  
Lowercase:  
Notes:  
In this mode, the number buttons input  
lowercase letters. For example, press  
the [2] button repeatedly to enter a, b,  
or c. The first item in the menu that  
begins with the entered letter will be  
selected.  
• Pressing the DTR-8.4’s [Display] button displays the  
current listening mode.  
• Although you are operating the DTR-8.4, the com-  
mands are actually being sent to the network audio  
server. Sometimes it may take the server awhile to  
respond to operations performed on the DTR-8.4.  
Number:  
In this mode, the number buttons input  
numbers. For example, press the [2]  
button and any item in the menu that  
begins with the number 2 will be  
selected.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select a track, and then  
press the [Enter] button to start  
playback.  
Press the [Delete] button to delete the  
entered letter or number.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 81 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Music Server Settings  
The Music Server or Playback OSD  
Display menu appears.  
This section explains how to select a network audio  
Server and how to choose the amount of track informa-  
tion that appears onscreen (OSD) during Net-Tune play-  
back.  
2-1.Music Server  
Input:NET A  
a.Select Server  
:*a-nettune  
OK  
Quit:[SETUP]  
1, 2  
1
3–5  
If you select1. Music Server”:  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Select Server,”  
5
3, 4  
and use the Left/Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select a server.  
]
2, 6  
Servers that are up and running have an  
asterisk (*) before their name.  
If a server is not listed, try restarting it.  
When you’ve selected a server,  
use the Down [ ] button to  
select “OK,and then press  
[Enter].  
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select  
either IRD or MSRV.  
1
This completes the server selection pro-  
cedure.  
If you select “2. Playback OSD  
Display”:  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select “a. Playback OSD  
Display,and use the Left/Right  
6
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
If the Basic menu appears, use the  
Down [ ] button to select Advanced  
Menu, and press the [Enter] button to  
display the Advanced menu.  
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Full: All track information is dis-  
played during playback.  
Simple: Only two lines of track infor-  
mation are displayed during  
playback.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Input Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
Off: Nothing is displayed during  
playback.  
The Input Setup menu appears.  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Note:  
You must select the IRD or MSRV input source to  
make these settings. The 1. Music Server menu item is  
not available when a different input source is selected.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
4
tons to select “1. Music Server”  
or “2. Playback OSD Display,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons, [Setup] button,  
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons, and [Enter] button.  
• The track information display is not affected by the  
Display Position setting on page 73.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 82 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
2
Network Settings  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select5. Network Setup,”  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
3
This section explains how to manually configure the  
DTR-8.4’s network settings.  
If your router’s DHCP server is enabled, by default the  
DTR-8.4 is set use DHCP to configure itself automati-  
cally (i.e., the DHCP/AUTO IP setting is On), so you  
don’t need to change any of the settings on the  
“5. Network Setup” menu. If your router’s DHCP server  
is disabled, for example, you’re using static IP addresses,  
you’ll need to configure these settings yourself. A  
knowledge of Ethernet networking is essential.  
The Network Setup menu appears.  
5.Network Setup  
1.IP Address  
2.Proxy Setup  
3.MAC Address  
4.Client Setup  
Save Settings  
[ENTER]Quit:[SETUP]  
What’s DHCP/AutoIP?  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) andAuto  
IP (Automatic IP Addressing) are services used by rout-  
ers, computers, the DTR-8.4, and other devices to auto-  
matically configure themselves on the network.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the menu items,  
and then press the [Enter] but-  
ton.  
4
5
What’s DNS?  
The IP Address menu is shown here.  
The DNS (Domain Name System) translates domain  
names into IP addresses. For example, when you enter a  
domain name such as www.integrahometheater.com in  
your Web browser, before accessing the site, your  
browser uses DNS to translate this into an IP address, in  
this case 63.148.251.142.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the settings, and  
use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set them.  
1, 2  
1
To enter an IP address, select the set-  
ting, and then press the [Enter] button.  
The [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons can  
then be used to enter numbers. Press the  
[Enter] button again to set the number.  
3, 4, 6  
3–6  
The settings are explained below.  
2, 7  
When you’ve completed the set-  
tings on any menu, press the  
[Return] button to return to the  
“5. Network Setup” menu, use  
the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select “Save Settings,and then  
press [Enter].  
Don’t turn off the DTR-8.4 while the  
settings are being saved (about 2 sec-  
onds), otherwise they’ll be lost.  
6
7
Press the [Input] button,and then  
roll the scroll wheel to select  
either “IRD” or “MSRV.”  
1
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
2
If the Basic menu appears, use the  
Down [ ] button to select Advanced  
Menu, and press the [Enter] button to  
display the Advanced menu.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 83 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Net-Tune—Continued  
Note:  
5-2. Proxy Setup  
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s input selector buttons, [Setup] button,  
[
If you use a proxy server with your Internet connection,  
you must enter the proxy server settings provided by  
your ISP.  
]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons, [Enter], and [Return]  
button.  
a. Proxy Server  
This setting determines whether or not the DTR-8.4 uses  
a proxy server for Internet radio.  
5-1. IP Address  
On: Use proxy server.  
Off: Don’t use proxy server.  
a. DHCP/AUTO IP  
This setting determines whether or not the DTR-8.4 uses  
DHCP and AutoIP to automatically configure the IP  
Address, SUBNET Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server set-  
tings.  
b. Proxy Address  
You must enter an IP address for a proxy server if you set  
the Proxy Server setting to On.  
Enter the proxy server IP address provided by your ISP.  
On: Use DHCP/Auto IP (default).  
Off: Don’t use DHCP/Auto IP.  
c. Proxy Port  
If you select Off, you must configure the IP Address,  
SUBNET Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server settings  
yourself. Otherwise, Net-Tune won’t work.  
You must enter an IP address for a proxy server if you set  
the Proxy Server setting to On.  
Enter the proxy port IP address provided by your ISP.  
b. IP Address  
You must specify an IP address if you set the DHCP/  
AUTO IP setting to Off.  
5-3. Mac Address  
Enter a static IP address provided by your ISP.  
a. MAC Address  
You can check the DTR-8.4’s MAC (Media Access Con-  
trol) address. This address cannot be changed.  
The IP address must be within the following ranges. Net-  
Tune will not work with IP addresses outside of these  
ranges.  
Class A: 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255  
Class B: 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255  
Class C: 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255  
Most routers use Class C IP addresses.  
5-4. Client Setup  
A network typically consists of a server and several cli-  
ents. On a Net-Tune network, the network audio server  
is the server and the DTR-8.4 is the client.  
c. SUBNET Mask  
You must specify the subnet mask IP address if you set  
the DHCP/AUTO IP setting to Off.  
a. Client Name  
You can check the DTR-8.4’s client name. This name is  
Enter the subnet mask IP address provided by your ISP  
(typically: 255.255.255.0).  
preset at the factory and cannot be changed.  
b. Wakeup on LAN  
This setting determines whether or not the DTR-8.4  
maintains its network connection while its on Standby.  
d. Gateway  
You must enter a gateway IP address if you set the  
DHCP/AUTO IP setting to Off.  
On: Maintain network connection.  
Off: Close network connection while on Standby  
(uses less power).  
Enter the gateway IP address provided by your ISP.  
e. 1st DNS Server, f. 2nd DNS Server  
You must enter the DNS server IP addresses if you set  
the DHCP/AUTO IP setting to Off.  
c. NTSP Port  
This is the TCP/IP port number that is used for commu-  
nication with the network audio server. To enable com-  
munication, this port number must agree with the port  
number setting in network audio server. Unless you have  
a special reason for doing so, don’t change this number.  
Enter the DNS server IP addresses provided by your ISP.  
If your ISP supplied only one DNS address, enter it in  
the e. 1st setting.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 84 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Zone 2  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite video input on  
your Zone 2 TV.  
Connecting Zone 2  
With Zone 2 you can enjoy one input source in the main  
room and a different source in another room. With  
Zone 2 you can enjoy one input source in the main room  
and a different source in another room.  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your power amp.  
There are three connection methods: using a receiver/  
integrated amp in Zone 2, using a power amp in Zone 2,  
or using only a pair of speakers in Zone 2.  
Main room  
TV  
Using a Receiver/Integrated Amp in Zone 2  
DTR-8.4  
With this connection method you can use 7.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a differentAV source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the receiver/inte-  
grated amp.  
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Surr Back (see  
page 86).  
DTR-8.4  
SURR  
SUR  
R
L
BACK/  
ZONE  
2
• Use an RCA/phono audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s AUDIO ZONE 2 OUT L/R outputs to ana-  
log audio inputs on your receiver/integrated amp.  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite video input on  
your Zone 2 TV.  
Zone 2  
Power amp  
Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker terminals  
on your receiver/integrated amp.  
Using Only Speakers in Zone 2  
Main room  
With this connection method you can use 5.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a differentAV source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the DTR-8.4.  
TV  
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Zone 2 (see  
page 86).  
DTR-8.4  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the DTR-8.4’s  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS terminals.  
DTR-8.4  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT to a composite video input on  
your Zone 2 TV.  
R
L
ZONE 2  
OUT  
Zone 2  
Main room  
IN  
TV  
TV  
R
L
DTR-8.4  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
DTR-8.4  
Using a Power Amp in Zone 2  
SURR  
BACK  
ZONE 2  
SPEAKERS  
With this connection method you can use 5.1 surround  
sound in the main room and play a different source in  
Zone 2. Zone 2’s volume is adjusted on the DTR-8.4.  
R
L
• Set the Surr Back/Zone2 setting to Zone 2 (see  
page 86).  
Zone 2  
• Use an RCA/phono audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s PRE OUT SURR BACK/ZONE 2 L/R out-  
puts to the analog audio inputs on your power amp.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 85 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Zone 2—Continued  
Using the 12V Trigger  
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet  
While Zone 2 is active on the DTR-8.4, the ZONE 2 12V  
TRIGGER OUT outputs 12 volts (100 milliamperes  
max). By connecting this to the 12-volt trigger input on,  
say, a power amp in Zone 2, the power amp will turn on  
and off automatically when Zone 2 is turned on and off  
on the DTR-8.4.  
In the following diagram, an IR receiver picks up the  
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds  
them to the DTR-8.4 in the cabinet via the connecting  
block.  
• On the Remote Setup menu, set the Position setting to  
“Main” (see page 48).  
Using the Remote Control in Zone 2  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
To use the remote controller to control the DTR-8.4 from  
Zone 2, you’ll need one of the following commercially  
available multiroom remote control kits:  
IR IN  
• Onkyo Multiroom Kit (IR remote controller extension  
system)  
DTR-8.4  
• Multiroom AV distribution and control systems such  
as those made by Niles and Xantech.  
Inside  
cabinet  
Remote controller  
These kits can also be used when the DTR-8.4 is not in  
line of sight of the remote controller, for example, when  
it’s installed inside a cabinet.  
You can set the transmission signal format to RF for use  
with the optional RF Receiver (see page 98).  
Signal flow  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other  
Components  
In the following diagram, an IR emitter is connected to  
the DTR-8.4’s IR OUT socket and placed in front of the  
other component’s remote control sensor. Only infrared  
signals received at the IR IN socket are fed to the other  
component. Signals picked up by the DTR-8.4’s remote  
control sensor are not passed on.  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2  
In the following diagram, an IR receiver picks up the  
infrared signals from the remote controller in Zone 2 and  
feeds them to the DTR-8.4 in the main room via the con-  
necting block.  
• On the Remote Setup menu, set the Position setting to  
“Zone 2” (see page 48).  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
IR IN  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
IR OUT  
DTR-8.4  
block  
DTR-8.4  
IR Emitter  
Remote controller  
Other component  
Remote controller  
Signal flow  
Main room  
Zone 2  
Connect the IR emitter to the DTR-8.4’s IR OUT socket  
as shown below.  
Signal flow  
Connect the miniplug cable from the connecting block to  
the DTR-8.4’s IR IN socket as shown below.  
Miniplug cable  
from the connecting block  
Other component  
Miniplug cable  
Remote control  
sensor  
IR  
IN  
Emitter  
IR  
IN  
Miniplug  
OUT  
DTR-8.4  
IR Emitter  
DTR-8.4  
OUT  
Signal flow  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 86 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Zone 2—Continued  
Setting the Surr Back/Zone 2 Outputs  
Use the Left/Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
4
This section explains how to set the PRE OUT SURR  
BACK/ZONE 2 outputs and the SURR BACK/ZONE 2  
SPEAKERS terminals for use as surround back outputs  
or Zone 2 outputs.  
Surr Back: Use the SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAKERS and  
PRE OUT) as surround back outputs.  
Select this option when connecting a  
receiver/integrated amp in Zone 2 (see  
page 84).  
Zone 2: Use the SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAKERS or PRE  
OUT) for Zone 2.  
1
Select this option when connecting a  
power amp or only speakers in Zone 2  
(see page 84).  
2, 3  
2–4  
Press the [Setup] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
5
1, 5  
Note:  
• When the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAK-  
ERS and PRE OUT) are set to Zone 2, listening modes  
that need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby Digital  
EX, DTS-ES, and THX Surround EX) are not avail-  
able.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then  
press the [Setup] button.  
If the Basic menu appears, use the  
Down [ ] button to select Advanced  
Menu, and press the [Enter] button to  
display the Advanced menu.  
1
• This procedure can also be performed by using the  
DTR-8.4’s [Setup] button, [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] but-  
tons, and [Enter] button.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
2
tons to select “0. Hardware  
Setup,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
3
tons to select “2. Surr Back/  
Zone2,and then press the  
[Enter] button.  
The Surr Back/ Zone2 menu appears.  
0-2.Surr Back/Zone2  
a.Surr Back/Zone2  
:Surr Back  
Quit:[SETUP]  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6_Advnced_En Page 87 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:42 AM  
Zone 2—Continued  
To adjust the Zone 2 volume with  
the remote controller, press the  
[Zone 2] button, and then use the  
Level [+]/[–] buttons.  
Controlling Zone 2  
3
The section explains how to turn on, select an input  
source, and adjust the volume for Zone 2.  
To do this on the DTR-8.4, use the  
Zone 2 Level [ ] [ ] buttons.  
If your Zone 2 receiver/integrated amp  
is connected to the DTR-8.4’s AUDIO  
ZONE 2 OUT L/R outputs, use the vol-  
ume control on the receiver/integrated  
amp.  
4
1
1, 2, 3, 4  
2
To turn off Zone 2 with the  
remote controller, press the  
[Zone 2] button followed by the  
[Standby] button.  
4
To do this from the DTR-8.4,  
press the [Zone 2] button, and  
then press the [Off] button within  
eight seconds.  
3
Point the remote controller at the  
DTR-8.4 and press the [Zone 2]  
button, make sure the [Zone 2]  
button is illuminated, then fol-  
lowed by the [On] button.  
This activates Zone 2 and, if connected  
to the DTR-8.4’s 12V TRIGGER OUT,  
turns on the Zone 2 amp.  
1
2
Notes:  
• If the Sleep function has been set, any Zone 2 compo-  
nent will turn off along with the DTR-8.4 when the  
specified sleep time expires. To use the Sleep function  
with Zone 2 only, set the Sleep function and then set  
the DTR-8.4 to Standby.  
• Only analog input sources are output by the PRE OUT  
SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs and the SURR BACK/  
ZONE 2 SPEAKERS terminals. Digital input sources  
are not output. If no sound is heard when an input  
source is selected, check if it’s connected to analog  
inputs.  
To select the Zone 2 input source  
with the remote controller, press  
the [Zone 2] button and then roll  
the scroll wheel.  
The name of the selected Zone 2 source  
appears on the display.  
• Since the Zone 2 function and the REC OUT outputs  
use the same circuitry, if the [Rec Out] button is  
pressed, Zone 2 will be turned off.  
• When the SURR BACK/ZONE 2 outputs (SPEAK-  
ERS/PRE OUT) are set to Zone 2 (page 86), listening  
modes that need surround back speakers (i.e., Dolby  
Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Surround EX) are not  
available.  
To do this on the DTR-8.4, press  
the [Zone 2] button, and then  
press an input selector button  
within eight seconds.  
If you select AM or FM, you can use  
the remote controller’s [CH/Disc] but-  
ton to select the presets.  
To set the main room and Zone 2  
sources simultaneously, press the  
[Zone 2] button repeatedly until “Z2  
Sel: SOURCE” appears on the display.  
Now use the scroll wheel or input selec-  
tor buttons to select the source.  
• While Zone 2 is active,  
functions will not work.  
• While Zone 2 is active, the PureAudio listening mode  
cannot be selected for the main room.  
You can’t select different radio bands for Zone 2 and  
the main room. For example, if you select FM for the  
main room, then FM will also be selected for Zone 2.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 88 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other  
Components  
You can use the DTR-8.4’s remote controller to control  
your other AV components, including those made by  
other manufacturers. To do this you can:  
Use the number buttons to enter  
the 4-digit remote control code.  
5
• Enter a remote control code for the component that  
you want to control (e.g., DVD, TV, VCR).  
• Learn commands directly from the other component’s  
remote controller (see page 93).  
If the code is accepted, the following  
appears on the display for awhile, and  
then the normal display reappears.  
• Use the Macro function to learn a sequence of actions  
(see page 94).  
You can also edit the remote controller modes (see  
page 96).  
If the code is not accepted, after the  
message “RETRY” has been displayed,  
the code entry display reappears, and  
you should try entering the code again.  
Entering a Remote Control Code  
By entering the appropriate remote control code for each  
of your components, you can control each component by  
selecting the relevant remote controller mode: DVD, TV,  
VCR, CBL (cable), or SAT (satellite).  
To cancel this procedure at any point,  
press the [Custom] button.  
Select the remote controller  
mode, point the remote control-  
ler at the component, and check  
its operation.  
The remote controller buttons that can  
be used in DVD mode are shown on  
page 16. Those that can be used with  
the TV,VCR, CBL, and SAT modes are  
listed on pages 91 and 92.  
6
Look up the appropriate remote  
1
control code for the component.  
See “Remote Control Codes” on  
page 89  
Press and hold down the [Cus-  
tom] button for more than three  
seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“PRGRM,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
3
Remote Control Codes for an Integra/  
Onkyo DVD Player  
The remote control code that you use with an Integra/  
Onkyo DVD player depends on whether it’s connected  
via  
, as follows:  
5001: Use this code if you’ve connected an  
cable  
and an RCA/phono analog audio cable to your  
DVD player. This is the default setting, so if  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
the remote controller mode you  
want to use with the component,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
The following remote controller modes  
can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
or SAT.  
you’re using  
, you don’t need to change it.  
Point the remote controller at the DTR-8.4 to  
operate the DVD player.  
5002: Use this code if your DVD player doesn’t have  
an  
socket, or you’re not using  
. Point  
the remote controller at the DVD player to  
operate it.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 89 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Remote Control Codes  
CBL (cable receiver)  
VCR  
Manufacturer  
NEC  
Manufacturer  
Magnavox  
Memorex  
Movie Time  
NEC  
Control code  
Control code  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2009  
2008  
When two or more codes are given,  
try each one in turn, and choose the  
one that works best.  
3014  
3015  
NOBLEX  
Olympus  
Optonica  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
3016  
2010  
3003  
2017  
NSC  
3016  
2010, 2011  
2013  
DVD (DVD player)  
Oak  
3009  
Manufacturer  
Aiwa  
Control code  
5010  
Panasonic  
Philips  
3020  
Pentex Research  
Philco  
2009  
3007, 3008, 3014  
3017  
2010, 2011, 2014  
2010, 2014, 2017  
2006, 2013  
2001, 2002  
2010, 2011  
2017  
Apex  
5015, 5016  
5017, 5020  
5003  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
RCA  
Philips  
Denon  
3001, 3002  
3004, 3020  
3006  
Pioneer  
GE  
Proscan  
Quasar  
Hitachi  
5009  
Realistic  
Samsung  
Signature  
Sprucer  
Integra  
5001, 5002  
5001, 5002  
5023  
3017  
Radio Shack  
Integra Research  
JVC  
3002  
2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,  
2012, 2017  
Radio Shack/Realistic  
RCA  
3020  
Kenwood  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Mitsubishi  
Onkyo  
5017  
2001, 2002, 2003, 2008,  
2010, 2013  
Standard Component 3018  
5004  
Starcom  
Stargate  
Tocom  
3011  
5025, 5026  
5005  
2007, 2008, 2010, 2011,  
2012, 2017  
Realistic  
3011  
3013  
Samsung  
Sansui  
2008  
5001, 5002  
5011, 5017, 5020  
5004  
Universal  
View Star  
Zenith  
3005, 3006  
3009, 3014, 3016  
3019  
2006  
Panasonic  
Philips  
Sanyo  
2007, 2008  
2015  
Scott  
Pioneer  
Proscan  
RCA  
5006  
Sears  
2007, 2010, 2013  
2016, 2017  
2004  
5003  
Sharp  
5003  
VCR  
Shintom  
Singer  
Sanyo  
5012  
Manufacturer  
Aiwa  
Control code  
2012  
2010  
Sony  
5007, 5013  
5020  
Sony  
2004, 2018  
2010  
Technics  
Thomson  
Toshiba  
Xbox  
Akai  
2003, 2004  
2007  
STS  
5022, 5024  
5008  
Bell & Howell  
Canon  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tandy  
2010, 2011, 2012, 2014  
2012  
2010, 2011  
2014  
5022  
Carver  
2007  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
5020  
Citizen  
2008, 2009  
2005  
Teac  
2012  
5014  
Colortyme  
Craig  
Technics  
Teknika  
Toshiba  
Totevision  
Unitech  
Vector Research  
Video Concepts  
2010  
2008  
2010, 2012  
2013, 2015  
2008  
2001, 2005, 2008, 2009,  
2010, 2011  
Curtis Mathes  
SAT (satellite receiver)  
Manufacturer  
Dishnet  
Control code  
Daewoo  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
2012  
2008  
4008  
2001  
2005, 2006  
2005, 2006  
Echostar  
GE  
4010  
2003, 2010, 2012  
2007  
4001, 4002  
2008, 2010, 2012, 2013,  
2017  
Wards  
General Instruments 4003  
Fuji  
2004, 2010  
2012  
Hughes Network  
4011  
Funai  
XR-12000  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
2010, 2012  
Systems  
Garrard  
2012  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2009  
2004  
JVC  
4009  
2001, 2002, 2008, 2010,  
2011  
GE  
Panasonic  
Primestar  
Proscan  
RCA  
4006  
4007  
GoldStar  
2005, 2009  
2012  
4001, 4002  
4001, 4002  
4005  
Gradiente  
Harman Kardon  
Hitachi  
2005  
Sony  
2013  
Toshiba  
4004  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2008,  
2011, 2013, 2014  
JC Penney  
Jensen  
JVC  
2013  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2009  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2009  
2010  
CBL (cable receiver)  
Kenwood  
Kodak  
Manufacturer  
ABC  
Control code  
3001, 3002  
3006  
Magnavox  
2010, 2011, 2014  
Archer  
2005, 2006, 2007, 2009,  
2010, 2014  
Marantz  
Cableview  
Contec  
Eastern  
GE  
3004  
3009  
Matsushita  
Memorex  
Minolta  
2010  
3010  
2007, 2008, 2010, 2012  
3001, 3002  
3011  
2013  
Gemini  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
MTC  
2013  
General Instruments 3002  
2010  
Hamlin  
Hitachi  
Jerrold  
3012  
2008  
3002  
Multitech  
2008, 2012  
3002, 3011, 3013  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 90 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
TV  
TV  
Manufacturer  
Akai  
Control code  
1002  
Manufacturer  
Control code  
1003, 1004, 1007, 1008,  
1014, 1018  
Philips  
Amtron  
1009  
Pioneer  
Portland  
Prism  
1004, 1006  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1012  
Anam National  
AOC  
1003, 1009  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1009  
Audiovox  
Bell & Howell  
Celebrity  
Citizen  
Proscan  
Proton  
1001  
1010, 1017  
1002  
1004, 1006, 1007  
1003, 1012  
1010, 1017  
Quasar  
1004, 1006, 1009, 1017  
1004, 1006  
1007, 1009  
1009  
Radio Shack  
Colortyme  
Contec/Cony  
Craig  
1001, 1004, 1006, 1007,  
1009, 1010, 1017  
Radio Shack/Realistic  
RCA  
1001, 1003, 1004, 1005,  
1006, 1008  
Crown  
1009, 1014  
1001, 1004, 1006, 1010,  
1017  
Realistic  
Sampo  
1010, 1017  
1004, 1006  
Curtis Mathes  
Daewoo  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1004, 1006  
1001  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,  
1008  
Samsung  
Daytron  
Dimensia  
Dumont  
Sansui  
Sanyo  
Scott  
1029  
1004  
1004, 1010, 1017  
1004, 1006, 1007, 1009  
Electroband  
1002  
1002, 1003, 1004, 1006,  
1008  
1001, 1004, 1006, 1008,  
1010, 1015, 1016, 1017  
Electrohome  
Emerson  
Sears  
1004, 1006, 1007, 1009,  
1010, 1017, 1029  
Sharp  
1004, 1006, 1007  
1002, 1030, 1032  
1004, 1006, 1009  
1009  
Sony  
Envision  
Fisher  
Fujitsu  
Funai  
1004, 1006  
1010, 1017  
1070  
Soundesign  
Starlite  
1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,  
1018  
Sylvania  
1009  
1001, 1003, 1004, 1006,  
1011, 1012  
Symphonic  
Tatung  
1009  
GE  
1003  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,  
1008  
GoldStar  
Technics  
Techwood  
1012  
1004, 1006, 1012  
Hallmark  
Hitachi  
Infinity  
JBL  
1004, 1006  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1007,  
1009  
1004, 1006, 1007, 1013  
Teknika  
1014  
1014  
Toshiba  
1010, 1016, 1017  
1011  
Universal  
1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,  
1011, 1012, 1016  
JC Penney  
1001, 1004, 1005, 1006,  
1008, 1011, 1014, 1018  
Wards  
Jensen  
JVC  
1004, 1006  
1007, 1012, 1013, 1015  
1002, 1004, 1006  
1004, 1006, 1008  
1009  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1008  
1004  
Kawasho  
Kenwood  
Kloss Novabeam  
KTV  
1009  
LG  
1005  
Loewe  
1014  
Luxman  
1004, 1006  
1001, 1006, 1010, 1014,  
1016, 1017  
LXI  
1004, 1006, 1008, 1014,  
1018  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Megatron  
Memorex  
MGA  
1004, 1006, 1014  
1006  
1005, 1006, 1010, 1017  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1008  
1004, 1005, 1006, 1008  
1003  
Mitsubishi  
Motorola  
MTC  
1004, 1005, 1006  
1009  
Multitech  
NAD  
1006  
NEC  
1003, 1004, 1005, 1006  
1006  
Nikko  
Onwa  
1009  
Orion  
1029  
Panasonic  
1003, 1012, 1014  
1003, 1004, 1005, 1006,  
1007, 1008, 1014, 1018  
Philco  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 91 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Controlling a Satellite Receiver  
Controlling a VCR  
On,  
On,  
Standby  
Standby  
Number  
buttons  
Scroll wheel  
Scroll wheel  
Mode  
Enter  
Mode  
CH/Disc + –  
CH/ Disc + –  
VOL  
VOL  
Muting  
Muting  
Rec  
1. Press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “SAT.”  
1. Press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “VCR.”  
2. Point the remote controller at your satellite  
receiver, and use the following buttons (you must  
enter appropriate remote control code first).  
2. Point the remote controller at your VCR, and use  
the following buttons (you must enter appropriate  
remote control code first).  
Set the satellite receiver to On or  
Standby  
[On], [Standby]  
[CH/Disc]  
Set the VCR to On or Standby  
Select TV channels  
Play  
[On], [Standby]  
[CH/Disc]  
Select satellite channels  
Select menu items  
[
[
[
[
[
]
[
]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
]
Stop  
]
[Enter]  
Confirm selection  
Rewind  
Fast forward  
Pause  
]
]
Number buttons Enter numbers  
The following buttons control the DTR-8.4.  
]
Rec [  
]
Record  
[VOL]  
Adjust the DTR-8.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-8.4  
[Muting]  
The following buttons control the DTR-8.4.  
[VOL]  
Adjust the DTR-8.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-8.4  
[Muting]  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 92 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Controlling a TV  
Controlling a Cable Receiver  
*
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
On,  
On,  
INPUT  
Standby  
Standby  
1
2
3
+
TV CH  
-
@.  
-
'/  
ABC  
DEF  
TV CH + –*  
TV VOL  
4
5
6
Number  
buttons  
Number  
buttons  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
7
8
TUV  
9
PQRS  
WXYZ  
*
TV VOL  
+
10  
/
-- ---  
0
CLEAR  
DIRECT TUNING  
CUSTOM  
Scroll wheel  
Scroll wheel  
MACRO  
ZONE  
2
MODE  
INPUT  
Mode  
Mode  
DIMMER  
SLEEP  
TV Input  
TV  
INPUT  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
CH/Disc + –  
CH + –  
DISC  
VOL  
VOL  
-
Muting  
Muting  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
STEP/SLOW  
RANDOM  
AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE  
LAST  
M
SURR  
THX  
All ST  
STEREO  
-
REPEAT  
A
B
SEARCH MEMORY  
PURE  
A
DIRECT  
DSP  
DSP  
TEST  
TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
-
LEVEL  
+
PLAYLIST ALBUM  
AUDIO SEL  
ARTIST  
GENRE  
-
L
NIGHT  
Re EQ  
CAPS  
DELETE LANGUAGE LOCATION  
1. Press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “TV.”  
1. Press the [Mode] button, and then roll the scroll  
wheel to select “CBL.”  
2. Point the remote controller at your TV, and use  
the following buttons (you must enter appropriate  
remote control code first).  
2. Point the remote controller at your cable receiver,  
and use the following buttons (you must enter  
appropriate remote control code first).  
[On], [Standby]  
TV [  
TV CH [+]/[–]  
Set the TV to On or Standby  
TV on/off  
Set the cable receiver to On or  
Standby  
[On], [Standby]  
]
[CH/Disc]  
Select cable channels  
Select TV channels  
Number buttons Enter numbers  
Number buttons Enter numbers  
The following buttons control the DTR-8.4.  
[CH/Disc]  
[TV Input]  
Select cable channels  
Select TV or VCR input  
Adjust the TV volume  
[VOL]  
Adjust the DTR-8.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-8.4  
TV VOL [ ]/[  
]
[Muting]  
*: Buttons marked with an asterisk can always be used to con-  
trol a TV regardless of the currently selected remote control-  
ler mode. These buttons do not work with the additional TV  
modes.  
The following buttons control the DTR-8.4.  
[VOL]  
Adjust the DTR-8.4 volume  
Mute the DTR-8.4  
[Muting]  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 93 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Learning Commands from Another  
Remote Controller  
Point the remote controllers at  
each other, about 2 to 6 inches  
(5–15 cm) apart, and then, on the  
other remote controller,press the  
button whose command you  
want to learn.  
When the command has been learnt  
successfully, “OK” appears on the dis-  
play. You may need to press the button  
several times.  
5
You can teach the DTR-8.4’s remote controller new  
commands simply by transmitting commands from  
another remote controller one at time. For example, by  
transmitting the Play and Stop commands from your CD  
player’s remote controller, the DTR-8.4’s remote con-  
troller can be taught to transmit those commands when  
its Play [ ] and Stop [ ] buttons are pressed in CD  
mode.  
This is convenient when you want to add commands to  
buttons after entering a remote control code (page 88).  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
If the command is not learnt success-  
fully, after the message “FAIL” has  
been displayed, the mode select display  
reappears (step 3), and you should try  
again.  
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“LEARN,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
To teach the DTR-8.4’s remote  
controller more new commands,  
repeat steps 3 through 5.  
Press the [Custom] button when you’ve  
finished.  
6
Notes:  
• The following buttons cannot be taught new com-  
mands: [Light], [Custom], [Macro], [Mode], [Input],  
[Zone 2], and the scroll wheel button.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
3
the remote controller mode you  
want to teach a new command,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
The following remote controller modes  
can be selected: DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
or SAT.  
• The DTR-8.4’s remote controller can learn a total of  
150 commands. However, the commands of some  
remote controllers may use a lot of memory, in which  
case, this total will be reduced.  
• If the message “FULL” appears, the remote controller  
cannot learn any more commands because its memory  
is full.  
• By default, the DTR-8.4’s remote controller knows the  
commands for controlling an Integra/Onkyo CD  
player, cassette deck, DVD player, and MD player  
(e.g., Play, Stop, Pause, etc., buttons). You can teach  
these buttons new commands, although the defaults  
will be restored if the remote controller is reset.  
On the DTR-8.4’s remote control-  
ler, press the button you want to  
teach the new command.  
4
• To teach a new command to a button that has already  
been taught a command, simply repeat this procedure.  
• Like most remote controllers, the DTR-8.4’s remote  
controller uses infrared. Commands from remote con-  
trollers that don’t use infrared cannot be learnt.  
If you press a button that cannot be  
taught a new command, the message  
“RETRY” appears and you should  
press another button.  
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all  
learnt commands will be lost and will have to learnt all  
over again, so don’t discard your other remote control-  
lers.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 94 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Using Macros  
Roll the scroll wheel to select a  
macro, and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
4
With the Macro function you can program the remote  
controller to perform a sequence of actions with one  
press of a button. For example, normally you need to per-  
form the following actions to use a CD player that’s con-  
nected to the DTR-8.4:  
Macros are numbered from 1 to 8.  
1. Press the scroll wheel, (to select AMP mode).  
2. Press the [On] button (to turn on the DTR-8.4).  
Macro #1 selected  
Action #1  
3. Roll the scroll wheel to select CD (to select the CD  
remote controller mode and the CD input source).  
4. Press the Play [ ] button (to start the CD  
player).  
On the remote controller, press  
the buttons whose actions you  
want to program into the macro  
in the order you want them per-  
formed.  
With the Macro function you can program the remote  
controller to do all of this with one press of a button.  
5
Making Macros  
To program the CD example in the left  
column into a macro: press the scroll  
wheel, press the [On] button, roll the  
scroll wheel to select CD, press the  
scroll wheel, and then press the Play  
You can make up to eight macros, and each macro can  
perform up to eight actions.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
[
] button.  
Actions are numbered from 1 to 8.  
Macro #1 selected  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MACRO,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
8 actions learnt  
After each button is pressed, “SET” fol-  
lowed by “KEY” is displayed.  
To add an action that selects an input  
source for the main room or Zone 2,  
press the [Input] button or [Zone 2] but-  
ton, respectively, roll the scroll wheel to  
select the input source, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“EDIT,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
When you’ve finished, press the  
[Macro] button.  
6
After the following appears on the dis-  
play, the display returns to normal.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 95 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Running Macros  
Programmed macros can be run as follows.  
Press the [Macro] button.  
1
Macro #1 selected  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
macro’s number, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
2
1st character  
The actions in the macro are performed  
in the order in which they were pro-  
grammed.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select a  
character, and then press the  
scroll wheel to set it.  
5
The following characters are available.  
Naming Macros  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J  
K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z + –  
_
You can name your macros as follows. Names may con-  
tain of up to five characters.  
= < > _  
/
* space  
Macro #1 selected  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
1st character set  
Repeat step 5 until you’ve  
entered all 5 characters.  
The previous menu reappears.  
6
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MACRO,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
If the name you are entering consists of  
less than five characters, enter spaces at  
the end to make it up to five.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“NAME,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
4
number of the macro that you  
want to name, and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 96 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Reordering the Remote Controller Modes  
Editing Remote Controller Modes  
You can change the order in which the remote controller  
modes appears when you roll the scroll wheel. The posi-  
tion of the AMP mode cannot be changed.  
Adding New Remote Controller Modes  
You can add additional modes (DVD, TV, VCR, CBL,  
SAT) to the remote controller. This is useful if, for exam-  
ple, you have several DVD players or TVs.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MODE,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MODE,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“SORT,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“ADD,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
mode you want to move, and  
then press the scroll wheel.  
4
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
type of mode you want to add,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
4
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
5
mode before which you want to  
insert the specified mode, and  
then press the scroll wheel.  
Here the specified mode will be  
inserted before the “VCR” mode.  
You can add up to 8 additional modes:  
4 DVD, 2 TV, 1 VCR, and 1 CBL.  
If the move is successful, after “OK”  
has been displayed, the SORT display  
(step 3) reappears.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 97 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Deleting Remote Controller Modes  
Assigning Remote Controller Modes  
You can delete remote controller modes that you don’t  
need, such as modes for components that you don’t have.  
The AMP mode cannot be deleted.  
With this function you can assign a remote controller  
mode to an input source. This is useful when you con-  
nect, say, a CD recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT sockets.  
By assigning the CDR remote controller mode to the  
TAPE input source, you can use the remote controller to  
control the CD recorder.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MODE,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MODE,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“DEL,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“ASSIGN,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
mode you want to delete, and  
then press the scroll wheel.  
4
Roll the scroll wheel to select an  
input source, and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
4
If the mode is deleted successfully,  
after “OK” has been displayed, the  
DEL display (step 3) reappears.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
5
mode you want to assign to the  
specified input source, and then  
press the scroll wheel.  
If the assignment is successful, after  
“OK” has been displayed, the ASSIGN  
display (step 3) reappears.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 98 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Using the Remote Controller with Other Components—Continued  
Changing the Remote Controller’s  
Transmission Signal Format (IR/RF)  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the  
same channel as the RF receiver,  
and then press the scroll wheel.  
6
You can set the remote controller’s transmission signal  
format to either infrared (IR) or radio frequency (RF).  
The default setting is IR.  
Channels 0 to 3 can be selected.  
If the ID and channel have been set suc-  
cessfully, “OK” appears on the display.  
This is useful when, for example, the DTR-8.4 is  
installed in a rack or is not in line of sight of the remote  
controller as it allows you to use a commercially avail-  
able RF receiver to pick up commands from the remote  
controller, which are then fed to the DTR-8.4 via its IR  
IN socket. For this to work, you must assign the same ID  
and channel to the remote controller and RF receiver.  
Resetting the Remote Controller  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.  
Press and hold the [Custom] but-  
1
ton for more than three seconds.  
The remote controller enters Custom  
mode.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“SETUP,” and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“MODE,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
2
Roll the scroll wheel to selectIR/  
RF,” and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“RESET,and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
3
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“IR” or “RF,” and then press the  
scroll wheel.  
4
When you select “IR.”  
Roll the scroll wheel to select  
“YES,and then press the scroll  
wheel.  
4
The remote controller is reset to its  
default settings.  
If you select “RF,roll the scroll  
5
wheel to select the same ID as  
the RF receiver, and then press  
the scroll wheel.  
IDs 0 to 9 and A to F can be selected.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 99 Thursday,October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Troubleshooting  
If you have any trouble using your DTR-8.4, look for a  
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact your Integra/Onkyo dealer.  
Only the front speakers produce sound?  
• When the Stereo listening mode is selected, only the  
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
• When the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is  
selected, only the front speakers produce sound.  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
Power  
Can’t turn on the DTR-8.4?  
• Make sure that the power cord is properly plugged into  
the wall outlet. Make sure that the other end of the  
power cord is properly connected to the DTR-8.4’sAC  
INLET.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait five  
seconds or more, then plug the cable in again.  
Only the center speaker produces sound?  
• If you use the Pro Logic II Movie or Pro Logic II  
Music listening mode with a mono source, such as an  
AM radio station or mono TV program, the sound is  
concentrated in the center speaker.  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
The DTR-8.4 turns off as soon as it’s turned on?  
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.  
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-  
ately and contact your Integra/Onkyo dealer.  
The surround speakers produce no sound?  
• When the Stereo, Direct, or PureAudio listening mode  
is selected, the surround speakers produce no sound  
(page 56).  
• Depending on the source and current listening mode,  
not much sound may be produced by the surround  
speakers. Try selecting another listening mode.  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
Audio  
There’s no sound, or it’s very quiet?  
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 26).  
• Make sure that the inputs and outputs of all compo-  
nents are connected properly (page 26).  
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is  
correct and that the bare wires are in contact with  
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 23)  
• Make sure that the input source is properly selected  
(page 51).  
• Check the volume. It can be set from 0 to 100  
(page 51).  
The DTR-8.4 is designed for home theater enjoyment.  
It has a wide volume range, allowing precise adjust-  
ment.  
• If the MUTING indicator is shown on the display,  
press the remote controller’s [Muting] button to  
unmute the DTR-8.4 (page 52).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the  
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the speakers  
(page 52).  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-  
nected device. On some games consoles, such as those  
that support DVD, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio output format from a menu.  
• Make sure that the correct input signal audio format is  
selected with the [Audio Selector] button (page 53).  
• To use a turntable with an MC-type cartridge requires  
a commercially available MC phono preamp  
(page 35).  
The center speaker produces no sound?  
• When the Mono, Stereo, Direct, or Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode is selected, the center speaker produces no  
sound (page 56).  
• When the Orchestra listening mode is selected, the  
center speaker produces no sound (page 57).  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
The surround back speakers produce no  
sound?  
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-  
tening modes. Select another listening mode  
(page 56).  
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround  
back speakers with some sources.  
• If you are using the Dolby Digital EX or THX Sur-  
round EX listening mode, make sure that mode is set  
to On (see “Using the Digital Surround Modes” on  
page 60).  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
The subwoofer produces no sound?  
• When you play source material that contains no infor-  
mation in the LFE channel, the subwoofer produces  
no sound.  
• Make sure the speakers are configured correctly  
(page 41).  
• Make sure that none of the connecting cables are bent,  
twisted, or damaged.  
• Not all listening modes use all of the speakers  
(page 56).  
• Specify the speaker distances (page 43) and adjust the  
individual speaker levels (page 44).  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 100 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format?  
• Check the input signal format setting. Depending on  
the playback source, you can select Auto, Multich,  
Analog, DTS, or PCM (page 53).  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the con-  
nected device. On some games consoles, such as those  
that support DVD, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio output format from a menu.  
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-  
function.  
Video  
There’s no picture?  
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 26).  
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-  
nected.  
• If your video component is connected to a component  
video input, your TV must be connected to the compo-  
nent video output, unless the ComponentVideo setting  
is set to VIDEO (page 47).  
• Depending on the input signal, some listening modes  
cannot be selected (page 58).  
Can’t select the DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix orTHX  
Surround EX listening modes?  
• These modes cannot be selected when no surround  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the DTR-8.4 is connected is selected.  
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the  
video circuits are turned off and the DTR-8.4 outputs  
no video signals.  
back speakers are connected, or Zone 2 is being used.  
Can’t get 6.1 or 7.1 playback?  
• If no surround back speakers are connected, or Zone 2  
is being used, 6.1 and 7.1 playback is not possible.  
The volume cannot be set above 99?  
• When the levels of all speakers have been calibrated  
(page 44), the maximum volume setting may change.  
The onscreen menus (OSD) don’t appear, or  
they appear in an odd position?  
• Make sure that the video settings are correct  
(page 46).  
Noise can be heard?  
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power  
cords, speaker cables, and so on may degrade the  
audio performance, so don’t do it.  
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
• Check the Display Position and OSD Position settings  
(page 73).  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the DTR-8.4 is connected is selected.  
The Late Night function doesn’t work?  
• Make sure the source material is Dolby Digital  
(page 62).  
Tuner  
Reception is noisy, FM stereo reception is  
noisy, or the FM STEREO indicator doesn’t  
appear?  
The multichannel input doesn’t work?  
• Check the MULTI CH INPUT connections (page 29).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to  
the correct input source (page 63).  
• Relocate your antenna.  
• Move the DTR-8.4 away from your TV or computer.  
• Try using the AUTO FM mode (page 54).  
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
• Set the audio input signal format to Multich (page 53).  
About DTS signals  
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-  
stream stops, the DTR-8.4 remains in DTS listening  
mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to pre-  
vent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or  
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your  
player from DTS to PCM, because the DTR-8.4 does  
not switch formats immediately, you may not hear any  
sound, in which case you should stop your player for  
about three seconds, and then resume playback.  
• With some CD and LD players, you won’t be able to  
playback DTS material properly even though your  
player is connected to a digital input on the DTR-8.4.  
This is usually because the DTS bitstream has been  
processed (e.g., output level, sampling rate, or fre-  
quency response changed) and the DTR-8.4 doesn’t  
recognize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases,  
you may hear noise.  
Remote Controller  
The remote controller doesn’t work?  
• Make sure that the batteries are installed with the cor-  
rect polarity (page 8).  
• Install new batteries. Don’t mix different types of bat-  
teries or old and new batteries (page 8).  
• Make sure that the remote controller is not too far  
away from the DTR-8.4, and that there’s no obstruc-  
tion between the remote controller and the DTR-8.4’s  
remote control sensor (page 8).  
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,  
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 101 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
• Make sure that the DTR-8.4 is not subjected to direct  
sunshine or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Relocate  
if necessary.  
• If the DTR-8.4 is installed in a rack or cabinet with  
colored-glass doors, the remote controller may not  
work reliably when the doors are closed.  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 14).  
• When using the remote controller to control other  
manufacturersAV components, some buttons may  
not work as expected.  
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control  
code.  
Net-Tune  
Can’t access Internet radio or the network audio  
server?  
• Check the connection between the DTR-8.4 and the  
LAN port on your router or switch.  
• Make sure that your modem and router are properly  
connected, and make sure they are both turned on.  
• Make sure that the Network Setup settings are correct  
(page 82).  
Playback stops while listening to Net-Tune  
tracks?  
• Make sure that your Net-Tune system meets the sys-  
• If you change the remote controller’s transmission sig-  
nal format to RF, be sure to select the same ID as the  
RF receiver.  
tem requirements listed on page 75.  
• If network audio server is serving WAV les to several  
clients at the same time, the network may become  
overloaded and playback may be interrupted. This can  
be resolved by preparing an Ethernet network exclu-  
sively for use with Net-Tune, separating it from gen-  
eral network traffic, and by using switches to improve  
network performance.  
Can’t control other components?  
• If it’s an Integra/Onkyo component, make sure that the  
cable and analog audio cable (RCA/phono) are  
connected properly. Connecting only an  
won’t work (page 36).  
cable  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 14).  
• If you connect an MD recorder to the TAPE sockets,  
be sure to set make the necessary setting (page 50).  
Can’t get a list of Internet radio stations from  
the Xiva-Net online database?  
• Try again later.  
Can’t access music on the selected server, or  
can’t connect to the server?  
• Make sure that your network audio server is turned on.  
• Add the MP3 and WAV les on your network audio  
server database.  
Can’t learn commands from other remote con-  
trollers?  
• Make sure that the transmitting ends of both remote  
controllers are pointing at each other.  
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that  
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot  
be learnt, especially those that transmit several  
instructions with a single button press.  
• On the 5-4. Client Setup menu, make sure that the  
NTSP Port setting is set to the same port number as  
network audio server. Correct as necessary (page 83).  
Can’t select albums?  
• Use network audio server to add album names to your  
Recording  
music files.  
Can’t select artists?  
• Use network audio server to add artist names to your  
music files.  
Can’t record?  
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is  
selected (e.g., digital or analog).  
Can’t select by genre?  
• Use network audio server to add genre names to your  
music files.  
Zone 2  
Zone 2 has turned off?  
No playlists are available?  
• Use network audio server to create some playlists.  
• Was the Sleep function set? The Sleep function turns  
off Zone 2 as well as the DTR-8.4. To set the Sleep  
function for Zone 2 only, see page 87.  
For other Net-Tune-related issues, please see the Net-  
Tune FAQ on the Integra/Onkyo Web site.  
There’s no sound?  
• Since the Zone 2 function and the REC OUT outputs  
use the same circuitry, you cannot use Zone 2 and  
record at the same time. When the [Rec Out] button is  
pressed, Zone 2 is turned off.  
The Surr Back speaker setting doesn’t appear?  
• If no surround back speakers are connected, or the sur-  
round back outputs are being used with Zone 2, this  
setting is unavailable.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 102 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
“Surr Back/Zone 2 setting is Surr Back”  
• Operation not allowed because the Surr Back/Zone 2  
setting on the 0-2 Surr Back/Zone 2 menu is set to Surr  
Back.  
Others  
The sound changes when I connect my head-  
phones?  
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
Direct, or Pure Audio. When you disconnect the head-  
phones, the previous listening mode is resumed.  
“Surr Back/Zone 2 setting is Zone 2”  
• Operation not allowed because the Surr Back/Zone 2  
setting on the 0-2 Surr Back/Zone 2 menu is set to  
Zone 2.  
Can’t change a setting?  
• Not all settings appear on the Basic menu. Select the  
Advance menu.  
• Some settings are not available while using Net-Tune.  
“Not available with the Surr Back/Zone 2 set-  
ting”  
• Operation not allowed with the current Surr Back/  
Zone 2 setting on the 0-2 Surr Back/Zone 2 menu.  
Can’t use an audio adjust function?  
• Some audio adjust functions can’t be used with certain  
listening modes.  
“Not available with Muting”  
• Operation not allowed because the DTR-8.4 is cur-  
rently muted.  
The speaker distance cannot be set as  
required?  
• If the distance between the furthest and nearest speak-  
ers is greater than 20 feet (6 meters), corrected values  
suitable for home theater use will be set automatically  
(page 43).  
“Zone 2 is not On”  
• Operation not allowed because Zone 2 is off.  
The DTR-8.4 contains a microcomputer for signal pro-  
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,  
severe interference, noise from an external source, or  
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely  
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet, wait at least five seconds, and then plug it  
back in again.  
The display doesn’t work?  
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode is selected.  
• While a video signal from a video component is being  
output, actions are not displayed onscreen.  
“0. Hardware Setup” does not appear in the  
menu?  
• Once you’ve configured the Hardware Setup settings,  
“0. Hardware Setup” no longer appears in the Basic  
menu. Select the Advanced menu to access these set-  
tings (page 39).  
To reset the DTR-8.4 to its factory defaults, turn it on and,  
while holding down the [Video 1] button, press the  
[Standby/On] button. When the reset is complete,  
“CLEAR” appears on the display and the DTR-8.4 enters  
Standby mode.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by  
the unit’s malfunction. Before you record important  
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-  
rectly.  
Error Messages  
“Not available With Headphones Use”  
• Operation not allowed while a pair of headphones is  
connected.  
“Not available With Multichannel Use”  
• Operation not allowed while the multichannel input is  
being used.  
“Not available In This Sp Config”  
• Doesn’t work with the current speaker configuration.  
“Not available in Zone 2 Mode”  
• This setting cannot be changed while Zone 2 is being  
used.  
“Only available With Dolby D”  
• Can be used with only Dolby Digital.  
“Not available with this signal”  
• Doesn’t work with the current listening mode.  
“Not available in Pure Audio mode”  
• Operation not allowed while the Pure Audio listening  
mode is selected.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 103 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
General  
Power output:  
All channels:  
110 W (8 , 20 Hz–20 kHz, FTC)  
(American Model)  
150 W (6 , 1 kHz, DIN)  
(Australian model)  
2 x 280 W (3 , front)  
2 x 220 W (4 , front)  
2 x 140 W (8 , front)  
Power supply:  
American model: AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Australian model: AC 230–240 V, 50 Hz  
American model: 9.0 A  
Power consumption:  
Australian model: 670 W  
Dynamic power:  
Standby power  
consumption:  
Dimensions  
2.5 W  
THD (total harmonic  
distortion):  
Damping factor:  
Input sensitivity and  
impedance:  
(W x H x D):  
17-1/8" x 6-7/8" x 18-1/8"  
(435 x 175 x 460 mm)  
40.8 Ibs. (18.5 kg)  
0.08% (rated power)  
60 (8 )  
Weight:  
Video Inputs  
Component video inputs:2 (Input 1, Input 2)  
S-Video inputs:  
Video inputs:  
200 mV/50k (LINE)  
2.5 mV/50k (PHONO MM)  
Output level and  
impedance:  
Phono overload:  
Frequency response:  
Tone control:  
6 (DVD, Video 1–5)  
6 (DVD, Video 1–5)  
200 mV/470 (REC OUT)  
120 mV (MM, 1 kHz, 0.5%)  
5 Hz–100 kHz/+1 dB, –3 dB (CD, Direct)  
10 dB, 50 Hz (BASS)  
Video Outputs  
Component video  
outputs:  
1 (Component Monitor Out)  
3 (Video 1 Out, Video 2 Out, Video  
Monitor Out)  
4 (Video 1 Out, Video 2 Out, Video  
Monitor Out, Zone 2 Video Out)  
10 dB, 20,000 Hz (TREBLE)  
S-Video outputs:  
S/N ratio (Direct mode): 110 dB (LINE, IHF-A, 0.5 V input)  
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A, 5 mV input)  
Speaker impedance:  
Video outputs:  
4–16 Ω  
Video Section  
Audio Inputs  
Digital inputs:  
8 (Optical 1–4, Optical Video 5 (fixed, on  
front panel), Coaxial 1–3)  
9 (CD, Phono, Tape, DVD, Video 1–4,  
Input sensitivity, output  
level and impedance:  
1.0 Vp-p/75 (component and S-Video  
Y)  
Analog inputs:  
Video 5)  
0.7 Vp-p/75 (component PB/CB, PR/CR)  
0.286 Vp-p/75 (S-Video C)  
1.0 Vp-p/75 (composite)  
Multichannel analog  
inputs:  
7.1 ch (Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,  
Surround Back L/R, Subwoofer)  
Component video  
frequency response:  
Audio Outputs  
Digital outputs:  
5 Hz–50 MHz  
2 optical  
Analog outputs:  
4 (Tape Out, Video 1 Out, Video 2 Out,  
Zone 2 Out)  
Tuner Section  
Pre outs:  
8 (Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,  
Surround Back L/R or Zone 2 L/R,  
Subwoofer)  
FM  
Tuning frequency range: 87.5–108.0 MHz  
Subwoofer pre out:  
Speaker outputs:  
Phones:  
1
7
1
Usable sensitivity:  
FM STEREO 17.2 dBf, 2.0 µV (75 Ω  
IHF)  
FM MONO 11.2 dBf, 1.0 µV (75 IHF)  
FM STEREO 70 dB (IHF-A)  
FM MONO 76 dB (IHF-A)  
FM STEREO 0.3%  
S/N ratio:  
THD:  
Other Sockets  
RS-232:  
IR in/out:  
12V trigger out:  
Ethernet (Net-Tune)  
1
1
3
FM MONO 0.2%  
FM stereo separation: 45 dB at 1 kHz, 30 dB at 100 Hz–10 kHz  
1 (10Base-T, RJ45)  
AM  
Tuning frequency range: 530–1710 kHz (American model)  
522–1611 kHz (Australian model)  
Usable sensitivity:  
S/N ratio:  
THD:  
30 µV  
40 dB  
0.7%  
Specifications and features are subject to change without  
notice.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DTR-8.4_En.book Page 104 Thursday, October 16, 2003 11:09 AM  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION  
18 park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.integrahometheater.com  
Integra Division of  
ONKYO CORPORATION  
Sales & Product Planning Div.: 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124  
En  
SN 29343578  
(C) Copyright 2003 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
I0310-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide.fm Page 1 Thursday, October 16, 2003 9:30 AM  
DTR-8.4  
Quick Guide  
• This guide shows you how to connect your speakers and DVD player and enjoy 7.1 surround sound.  
• For full details on using the DTR-8.4, refer to the main instruction manual.  
Enjoying Home Theater  
Front left and right speakers  
These output the overall sound. Their role in a home theater is to provide a  
solid anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the lis-  
tener at about ear level, and equidistant from the TV. Angle them inward so  
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.  
Center speaker  
Surround back speakers  
This speaker enhances the front left  
These speakers further  
and right speakers, making sound  
enhance the realism of sur-  
movements distinct and providing a  
round sound and improve  
full sound image. In movies it’s used  
sound localization behind the  
mainly for dialog.  
listener. Position them behind  
the listener about 3 feet  
Position it close to yourTV (preferably  
on top) facing forward at about ear  
(100 cm) above ear level.  
level, or at the same height as the  
front left and right speakers.  
Subwoofer  
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds  
of the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects)  
channel. Position it in a corner or one-  
third of the way along the front wall.  
Surround left and right speakers  
These speakers are used for precise sound positioning and to add real-  
istic ambience. Position them at the sides of the listener, or slightly  
behind, about 3 feet (100 cm) above ear level. Ideally they should be  
equidistant from the listener.  
En  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide.fm Page 2 Thursday, October 16, 2003 9:30 AM  
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Attaching the Speaker Labels  
Connecting the Speaker Cables  
The DTR-8.4’s positive (+) speaker terminals are color-  
coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)  
speaker terminals are all black.)  
Strip about 5/8" (15 mm)  
of insulation from the  
ends of the speaker  
cables, and twist the bare  
wires tightly, as shown.  
5/8" (15 mm)  
1
Speaker terminal  
Front left  
Color  
White  
Red  
Front right  
Center  
Green  
Blue  
Unscrew the terminal.  
2
3
Surround left  
Surround right  
Surround back/Zone 2 left  
Surround back/Zone 2 right  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
Fully insert the bare  
wires.  
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you  
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each  
speaker cable in accordance with the above table. All  
you need to do then is to match the color of each label to  
the corresponding speaker terminal.  
Screw the terminal tight.  
4
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.  
Front right  
speaker  
Center  
speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
DTR-8.4  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
1
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
OUT  
Y
-
MODEL NO. DTR 8.4  
RATING: AC120V 60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
2
3
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
Powered  
subwoofer  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
INPUT  
Y
1
OPT  
1
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IR  
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12V  
TRIGGER OUT  
R
L
LINE INPUT  
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
IN  
2
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
LINE INPUT  
PRE OUT  
SUB  
If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re  
Surround  
back right  
speaker  
Surround  
back left  
speaker  
Surround  
left  
speaker  
Surround  
right  
speaker  
using an external amp, connect the PRE OUT  
SUB output to the amp’s input.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide.fm Page 3 Thursday, October 16, 2003 9:30 AM  
ConnectingYour TV & DVD Player  
Connecting a TV  
S VIDEO IN  
VIDEO IN  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT output to a composite video  
input on your TV.  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
OR  
Connectone  
or the other  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s S  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT output to an S-Video input on  
your TV.  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
R L  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
OPT  
1
ANTENNA  
COAX  
FRONT  
SUB  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
Connecting a DVD Player  
L
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
PR  
SURR  
SURR  
R
L
BACK/  
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
Using Optical or Coaxial Connections  
Use a coaxial digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN COAX 1 to the coaxial output  
on your DVD player, as shown.  
ZONE  
2
FM  
75  
2
3
4
OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
2
3
4
PR  
AUDIO  
R
L
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
IN  
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
IN DVD  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
A
VIDEO  
S
VIDE
DIGITAL  
OUT  
OR  
Use an optical digital audio cable to connect the  
DTR-8.4’s DIGITAL IN OPT 1, 2, 3, or 4 to the optical  
output on your DVD player, as shown.  
DIGITAL  
IN  
COAX  
1
IN  
DVD  
Initially, the COAX1 digital input is assigned to the  
DVD input source. If you connect your DVD player to a  
different digital input, you’ll need to reassign the DVD  
input source (see page 45 of the instruction manual).  
Connectone  
or the other  
Connectone  
or the other  
Using Composite Video or S-Video  
Use a composite video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
VIDEO DVD IN to the composite video output on your  
DVD player, as shown.  
DIGITAL OUT  
COAXIAL  
VIDEO OUT  
S VIDEO OUT  
OR  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
Use an S-Video cable to connect the DTR-8.4’s  
S VIDEO DVD IN to the S-Video output on your DVD  
player, as shown.  
DVD player  
Turning On the DTR-8.4  
1. Connect the power cord.  
Standby/On  
Master Volume  
2. Press the [Standby/On] button to turn on the  
Standby  
DTR-8.4.  
Direct/  
Zone  
2
(
)
GRN  
Pure Audio  
Rec (RED)  
Audio  
Selector  
DVD  
Video  
VCR  
1
Video  
VCR  
2
Video  
3
Video  
4
Video  
5
Tape  
Tuner  
Phono  
CD  
Net Audio  
Display  
Pure Audio  
U
psampling  
1
2
Push  
To  
Open  
DTR-8.4  
Using the remote controller  
1. Press the scroll wheel.  
2
“AMP” appears on the remote controller’s display.  
This is the mode for controlling the DTR-8.4.  
2
2. Press the [On] button to turn on the DTR-8.4.  
Scroll wheel  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Guide.fm Page 4 Thursday, October 16, 2003 9:30 AM  
Playing a DVD  
While neither the [Mode] button nor [Input] button is  
illuminated, rolling the scroll wheel changes the  
input source and remote controller mode.  
3
3
4. Start playback on your DVD player.  
Make sure that your DVD player’s digital audio out-  
put is turned on. On some players, the default setting  
is off. With some DVD-Video discs, you can select  
the audio format (Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM) from a  
menu.  
3
5
1. Turn on your DVD player and TV.  
5. Adjust the volume.  
2. Select the appropriate input on your TV.  
Select the input to which the DTR-8.4 is connected.  
3. Select the DVD input source.  
To adjust the volume, use the remote controller’s  
[VOL] button.  
The volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100. Since the  
DTR-8.4 has been designed for home theater enjoy-  
ment, it has a wide volume range, allowing precise  
adjustment.  
Roll the scroll wheel to select the DVD input source.  
Selecting Listening Modes  
[Direct/Pure Audio] button (DTR-8.4)  
This button selects the Direct and Pure Audio listening  
modes.  
Scroll wheel  
[Stereo] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
[Surround] button  
This button selects the following listening modes for use  
with 2-channel analog input sources: Dolby Pro Logic II  
Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema,  
and DTS Neo:6 Music.  
Surround,THX,  
All CH ST,  
Stereo, Pure A,  
Direct  
If the current input source is digital, you can select  
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, DTS, DTS-ES, or  
DTS Neo: 6 with this button.  
Press the scroll wheel, and then use the [Sur-  
round], [THX], [All CH ST], [Stereo], [Pure A],  
[Direct], or DSP [ ]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-  
tening mode.  
[THX] button  
This button selects the THX listening modes. With 2-  
channel input sources, THX can be applied to Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie or DTS Neo:6 Cinema.  
The THX listening modes can be selected if the current  
input source is either analog or digital. If it’s digital, you  
can use this button to apply THX to DTS or DTS-ES.  
Notes:  
You cannot select any listening modes while the Mul-  
tich input source is selected.  
• Depending on the number of speakers that you con-  
nect, and the format of the input signal, you may not be  
able to select all of the listening modes.  
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the  
video circuits are turned off and the DTR-8.4 outputs  
no video signals.  
DSP [ ]/[ ] buttons  
These buttons are used to select Integra’s own DSP lis-  
tening modes—Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio Mix, etc.,  
and Mono or Theater-Dimensional.  
[All CH ST] button (remote controller)  
[Pure A] button (remote controller)  
This button selects the All Ch Stereo listening mode.  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
[Direct] button (remote controller)  
This button selects the Direct listening mode.  
SN 29343579  
I0310-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Net-Tune QuickStart_E Page 1 Friday, October 10, 2003 11:38 AM  
DTR-8.4/7.4 Net-Tune Quick Start Guide  
• This guide explains how to get started quickly with Net-Tune.  
• The DTR-8.4/7.4 can be used as a Net-Tune client on a standard Ethernet network, allowing you to play the music (MP3,  
WAV) stored on your network audio server through the DTR-8.4/7.4. If your network is connected to the Internet, you can  
also tune into Internet radio stations.  
• For full details on using Net-Tune, refer to the DTR-8.4/7.4’s instruction manual.  
Networking the DTR-8.4/7.4  
• For best results, a 100Base-TX. switched Ethernet net-  
work is recommended. Although it’s theoretically possi-  
ble to use a wireless network, due to unpredictable  
performance, it may not provide satisfactory results, so a  
wired network is recommended.  
DTR-8.4  
DIGITAL  
IN  
PRE OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
R
L
ANTENNA  
FRONT SPEAKERS  
SURR SPEAKERS  
COAX  
FRONT  
OUTPUT  
MONITOR  
AV RECEIVER  
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
OUT  
Y
MODEL NO. DTR-8.4  
RATING: AC120V  
60Hz 9.0A  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
AM  
OUT  
IN  
ZONE  
DVD  
2
PB  
SURR  
SURR  
AC OUTLETS  
PR  
R
L
BACK  
ZONE  
/
OPT  
1
INPUT 1  
Y
2
FM  
75  
OUT  
IN  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
1
SURR  
FRONT  
MULTI CH  
INPUT  
CENTER  
SPEAKER  
BACK/  
2
3
4
PB  
PR  
ZONE  
SPEAKERS  
2
AUDIO  
R
L
AC 120V  
SWITCHED  
TOTAL 120W 1A MAX.  
60Hz  
R
L
SUB  
CENTER  
PHONO  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
R
L
2
INPUT  
Y
2
SURR  
CD  
I
R
AC INLET  
IN  
A
ZONE  
2
12  
V
R
L
OUT  
OPT  
1
IN  
TRIGGER OUT  
IN  
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
3
4
PB  
PR  
RS232  
SURR  
BACK  
TAPE  
2
IN  
OUT  
B
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
IN  
GND  
R
L
R
L
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
OUT  
• The DTR-8.4/7.4 uses DHCP to configure its network  
settings automatically. Make sure that your router’s  
DHCP server is enabled. With most routers, the DHCP  
server is enabled by default.  
• Some routers have a modem built-in, and some ISPs  
require you to use specific routers. Please consult your  
ISP or computer dealer if you’re unsure.  
Internet radio  
Modem  
ETHERNET  
(Net -Tune)  
WAN port  
You may need to specify a proxy server to use Internet  
radio. If your network audio server is configured to use a  
proxy server, use the same settings.  
LAN port  
LAN port  
Router  
• To use Internet radio, your broadband Internet connec-  
tion needs to be up and running and able to access the  
Web. A narrowband Internet connection (e.g., 56K  
modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, so a  
broadband connection is recommended (e.g., cable  
modem, xDSL modem, etc).  
Network audio server  
LAN/Ethernet port  
Using Internet Radio  
1. Connect the DTR-8.4/7.4 to your Ethernet network via a router or switch, as shown above.  
2. Turn on the DTR-8.4/7.4.  
3. Roll the scroll wheel to select IRD (Internet Radio).  
4. Press the remote controller’s [Display] button.  
5. Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select Genres, Location, or Language, and then press the [Enter]  
button.  
The DTR-8.4/7.4 accesses the XiVA-Net online database to see what radio stations are available. This may take awhile.  
6. Use the Up/Down [ ]/[ ] and [Enter] buttons to select a radio station.  
The DTR-8.4/7.4 connects to the selected radio station and begins buffering audio data, the progress of which is dis-  
played in percent. When buffering reaches 100%, playback starts.  
Playing Tracks in the Network Audio Server  
1. Turn on the network audio server.  
2. Turn on the DTR-8.4/7.4.  
3. Roll the scroll wheel to select MSRV (Music Server).  
4. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback.  
En  
SN 29343594  
I0310-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

InFocus Car Video System INF7001A User Manual
Infortrend Network Card A12U A08U G2421 User Manual
Ingersoll Rand Water Pump PH10A X X User Manual
JBL Speaker SRX700 User Manual
Jensen Car Video System VM9511TS User Manual
John Deere Snow Blower MTF 031039C User Manual
JVC Flat Panel Television LT Z46ZF7 User Manual
Kathrein Satellite TV System UFS 705si User Manual
Kidde Smoke Alarm 0916E User Manual
KitchenAid Coffeemaker KSCX 3610 User Manual